Network+ 2005 Training & Test Preparation Guide

Network+

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Copyright© 2004 by Specialized Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written permission of the publisher, except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. Making copies of any part of this book for any purpose is a violation of United States copyright laws. For further information, please write to: Publisher, c/o Specialized Solutions, Inc., 338 East Tarpon Street, Tarpon Springs, FL 34689. ISBN: 1-893596-44-3 This book is sold as is, without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, respecting the contents of this book, including but not limited to implied warranties for the books quality, performance, merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Neither Specialized Solutions, Inc., nor its authorized distributors, shall be liable to the purchaser or any other person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or damage caused, or alleged to be caused, directly or indirectly by this book. Furthermore, any mention or reference to any products does not constitute an endorsement by Specialized Solutions, Inc. Publisher: Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Contributing Writers: Bill Ferguson Richard Harrison Garrett Smiley Editor: Bill Ferguson

Trademark Acknowledgments Brands and product names cited in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks held by their respective companies. Any use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark. Suggestions/Comments Please forward all comments or suggestions to: Specialized Solutions, Inc. 338 East Tarpon St. Tarpon Springs, FL 34689

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................................... I

ABOUT SPECIALIZED SOLUTIONS ...........................................................IX
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................1 COMPTIA TEST OBJECTIVES FOR NETWORK+ .............................................................2005 STUDY PLAN STRATEGIES ..................................................................................................9 YOUR VIDEO INSTRUCTOR .................................................................................................9 HOW TO TAKE THE TEST ..................................................................................................10 Who may take the test? ...............................................................................................10 How to Prepare to Ensure Exam Success...................................................................10 ABOUT THIS COURSE .......................................................................................................13 CHAPTER 1 – NETWORKING FUNDAMENTALS ..................................................17 INTRODUCTION TO NETWORKING ....................................................................................17 Benefits of Networking Computers .............................................................................17 Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wide Area Networks (WAN) .................................18 The Client/Server Relationship ...................................................................................19 Client/Server Networking............................................................................................19 Peer-to-Peer Networking ............................................................................................20 BASIC NETWORK STRUCTURE (TOPOLOGY).....................................................................21 Bus Topology ..............................................................................................................21 Star Topology..............................................................................................................22 Ring Topology.............................................................................................................22 SPECIAL TOPOLOGIES ......................................................................................................23 Hybrid Topologies ......................................................................................................23 Mesh Topology............................................................................................................23 Wireless Topology.......................................................................................................24 NETWORK ACCESS ...........................................................................................................26 Token Passing .............................................................................................................26 Ethernet.......................................................................................................................26 Fast Ethernet...............................................................................................................27 HUBS AND CONCENTRATORS ...........................................................................................28 Passive Hubs...............................................................................................................28 Active Hubs .................................................................................................................29 Hub-Based Networks ..................................................................................................29 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................30 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .................................................................................................31 REVIEW QUESTIONS - CHAPTER 1 ....................................................................................33 CHAPTER 2 - NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEMS (NOS) ....................................35 WHAT IS AN OPERATING SYSTEM? ..................................................................................35 Preemptive vs. Non-preemptive Multitasking .............................................................36 WHAT IS A NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM (NOS)? ........................................................37 Peer-to-Peer LANs......................................................................................................37 Server/Client Software ................................................................................................39 NOS PACKAGES...............................................................................................................42 Specialized Solutions, Inc. i

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Novell NetWare .......................................................................................................... 42 Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System................................................... 45 Windows NT Minimum Requirements ...........................Error! Bookmark not defined. UNIX Operating Systems............................................................................................ 47 Banyan VINES (Virtual Integrated Network Service)................................................ 48 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................... 50 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ................................................................................................. 51 REVIEW QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................ 52 CHAPTER 3- THE OSI MODEL AND COMMUNICATION STANDARDS.......... 55 THE SEVEN LAYERS OF NETWORK COMMUNICATION ..................................................... 55 SEVEN LAYERS OF THE OSI MODEL ................................................................................ 56 Application Layer ....................................................................................................... 56 Presentation Layer ..................................................................................................... 57 Session Layer.............................................................................................................. 57 Transport Layer.......................................................................................................... 57 Network Layer ............................................................................................................ 58 Data Link Layer.......................................................................................................... 58 Logical Link Control (LLC) ....................................................................................... 59 Media Access Control (MAC) .................................................................................... 59 Physical Layer............................................................................................................ 60 PROTOCOL STACKS ......................................................................................................... 62 Communication Between Peer Layers ....................................................................... 62 OSI AND THE REAL WORLD ............................................................................................ 64 DEVICES AND THE OSI MODEL ....................................................................................... 66 Repeaters .................................................................................................................... 66 Bridges........................................................................................................................ 66 Routers........................................................................................................................ 66 Brouters ...................................................................................................................... 67 Gateways .................................................................................................................... 67 IEEE 802 STANDARDS .................................................................................................... 68 NETWORK DRIVERS AND THE OSI MODEL ...................................................................... 70 NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification)......................................................... 70 ODI (Open Data Link Interface) ................................................................................ 70 PROTOCOLS AND OSI ...................................................................................................... 70 Protocol Binding ........................................................................................................ 71 Connection-Oriented vs. Connectionless ................................................................... 71 Routable vs. Non-Routable Protocols ........................................................................ 71 Networking Protocols and Stacks............................................................................... 72 AppleTalk.................................................................................................................... 73 DECnet ....................................................................................................................... 73 IPX/ SPX..................................................................................................................... 73 SMB (Server Message Block) ..................................................................................... 74 SNA (Systems Network Architecture) ......................................................................... 74 TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) ....................................................................... 74 IP (Internet Protocol)................................................................................................. 74 UDP (User Datagram Protocol)................................................................................ 74 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) ..................................................................................... 74 ii Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Table of Contents Telnet...........................................................................................................................75 NFS (Network File System).........................................................................................75 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)......................................................................75 RIP (Routing Information Protocol)...........................................................................75 NTP (Network Time Protocol) ....................................................................................75 OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) ...............................................................................75 ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)............................................................................75 X.25 .............................................................................................................................76 XNS (Xerox Network System)......................................................................................76 Non-Routable Protocols..............................................................................................76 DLC (Data Link Control)............................................................................................76 LAT (Local Area Transport) .......................................................................................76 NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)............................................................77 Other Protocols...........................................................................................................78 SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol)...........................................................................78 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) ...................................................................................78 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) ................................................................78 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ........................................................78 ISO/OSI Standard .......................................................................................................78 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ...............................................................78 DNS (Domain Name System) ......................................................................................78 XDR (External Data Representation) .........................................................................78 RPC (Remote Procedure Call)....................................................................................78 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................80 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .................................................................................................81 REVIEW QUESTIONS – CHAPTER 3 ...................................................................................82 CHAPTER 4 - HARDWARE MEDIA AND PERIPHERALS.....................................85 NETWORK CABLING .........................................................................................................85 Coaxial Cable .............................................................................................................85 Coaxial Connectors ....................................................................................................86 Twisted-Pair Cable .....................................................................................................88 Fiber-Optic Cable.......................................................................................................91 IBM Cabling................................................................................................................91 Summary of Cabling ...................................................................................................93 CABLING TERMS ..............................................................................................................94 AWG (American Wire Gauge) ....................................................................................94 Bandwidth ...................................................................................................................94 Plenum Grade Cabling ...............................................................................................94 Selecting Cables..........................................................................................................95 NETWORK INTERFACE CARDS (NICS)..............................................................................97 Preparing the Data .....................................................................................................97 Signals and Clocking ..................................................................................................97 Network Addressing/MAC Address.............................................................................98 DMA (Direct Memory Channel) .................................................................................98 Controlling the Data Flow..........................................................................................98 Configurable Options..................................................................................................98 Wireless NICs............................................................................................................100 Specialized Solutions, Inc. iii

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Fiber-Optic NICs...................................................................................................... 100 DATA BUS ARCHITECTURE ............................................................................................ 101 Standard Bus Types .................................................................................................. 101 Laptops ..................................................................................................................... 101 NETWORK PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................. 102 WIRELESS NETWORKS ................................................................................................... 103 Why Wireless? .......................................................................................................... 103 Wireless Transmission Methods............................................................................... 104 Radio Transmission.................................................................................................. 105 Satellite Station Networking..................................................................................... 106 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 108 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................... 109 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 4.................................................................................... 112 CHAPTER 5 – NETWORK PROTOCOLS & STANDARDS .................................. 115 ACCESS METHODS......................................................................................................... 116 CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) .................... 116 CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) ................... 117 Token Passing........................................................................................................... 117 Demand Priority....................................................................................................... 117 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS (FRAMES AND PACKETS) ............................................... 119 Packet Structure ....................................................................................................... 119 Packet Components .................................................................................................. 120 NETWORK STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 122 Logical Link Control (802.2).................................................................................... 122 Ethernet (802.3)........................................................................................................ 122 AppleTalk.................................................................................................................. 129 ARCNet ( Attached Resource Computer Network)................................................... 131 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 133 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................... 134 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 5.................................................................................... 136 CHAPTER 6 – NETWORK DESIGN.......................................................................... 139 STARTING A NETWORK PROJECT ................................................................................... 139 The Customer ........................................................................................................... 139 The Network Goals................................................................................................... 140 DETERMINE NETWORK TYPE ......................................................................................... 142 When to Choose Peer-to-Peer.................................................................................. 142 When to Choose Client/Server ................................................................................. 143 Making the Choice.................................................................................................... 144 Public and Private networks .................................................................................... 144 DESIGN THE NETWORK.................................................................................................. 150 Media Selection ........................................................................................................ 151 Environmental Concerns.......................................................................................... 152 NOS Selection........................................................................................................... 152 Protocol Selection .................................................................................................... 152 PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER ............................................................................................ 154 Cable to Computer ................................................................................................... 154 iv Specialized Solutions, Inc.

..184 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 7 ................................................................................................................................................. v ..................................................................................................................................182 Limitations of RAS ......197 DNS .................Table of Contents Cable to Hub ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................160 Hard Work ..............160 Standards ...............................................................................................161 HCL and Windows 2000 .............................................................................................................................EXPANDING A NETWORK ..........................................168 Carriers.........................................178 RAS Protocols ......................................................155 NETWORK AND HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY ...................................................................................164 CHAPTER 7 ................................................................................................................................................170 Circuit-switched Networks........................................157 Adapter Card Compatibility ...........................................................................................................................................................................................169 Analog Connectivity....192 The Top Five TCP/IP Protocols .........................................................168 WAN Overview...............................................................................................................................................157 Media Compatibility .........................169 Digital Connectivity ................................................ Inc..............................................................................................................................................................................................192 Other TCP/IP Protocols ................................................................................162 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 6 ...................................................................................................189 RFC (Request For Comments)...........................................................................................194 NAMING SYSTEMS ...........................................................................183 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .............................159 Computer Compatibility...........................................186 CHAPTER 8 – TCP/IP ESSENTIALS ....................................172 Packet Switching Networks.................................189 TCP/IP PROTOCOLS ...................................182 Troubleshooting a RAS setup...................................................................................................165 WHEN A LAN IS TOO SMALL .............................173 Advanced WAN Environments .......................................................................................................................................................................................................166 Bridges .....................................................................................................................................................167 Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................167 CONNECTION SERVICES ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................178 Connecting Two Computers.....................................159 PREVENTING COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................166 Repeaters..................................172 VLAN............................................................................166 Routers .............165 EXPANDING A LAN WITH HUBS.....................................176 REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING (RAS) ................................................................................................................................................................................174 MODEMS .................................................................................................................................................................................................................189 INTRODUCTION TO TCP/IP...........................................................160 RESOLVING COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS ....................179 Installing and Configuring RAS..................................197 Specialized Solutions...................................................................................................................161 Minimum Requirements ......................154 Network Adapter Cards .........................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................. 199 DHCP .................................... 219 CHAPTER 9 – TCP/IP UTILITIES...................... ..... 217 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 8................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 200 IP Proxy Servers........................................................................................ 223 NETSTAT ..................................................................................................................................................... 199 NETWORK CONNECTION UTILITIES ............................................................................................................................................................................ 225 IFCONFIG.................................................. 200 ICS ............................................................ 209 TCP/IP CONFIGURATION CONCEPTS ................................................................................................................................................................................. 203 Class A Addresses .............................................. 223 ROUTE.................................. 203 Class D and Class E Addresses........................................................................................ 225 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................................................................................ 205 SUBNETTING ................................................... 203 Class B Addresses ........................................ 199 BOOTP ................ 227 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 9............................................................................................................................................................................... 202 IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 203 IPv6 (IP Next Generation) ......................................................................................................... Inc............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 229 USER AND SHARE LEVEL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 225 IPCONFIG/WINIPCFG ..........................................................................SNMP ....................................................................... 203 Class C Addresses ............................................................................................................ 221 NETWORK MANAGERS .......... 202 IPv4 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 198 NETBIOS .....................................................................................Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide WINS............................ 222 EVENT VIEWER .......................... 225 PING............................................................................................. 225 ARP ..................................................... 223 TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS ................................................................................................................................................... 223 TRACERT............................................ 221 Agent Software .............................. 229 vi Specialized Solutions...................................................................................... 200 TCP/IP ADDRESSING...................................................................................................................................................... 221 Management Software..................................... 225 NSLOOKUP...................................................... 200 NAT................... 215 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ................................................................. 222 VALIDATION TOOLS ..................................... 199 LMHOSTS file ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 222 Communities........................................ 199 IP Gateway ....................................................... 207 How to Subdivide a Network ................................................................. 228 CHAPTER 10 – NETWORK SECURITY ....................................... 225 RARP.................................................................................. 223 NBTSTAT .................... 198 HOSTS file......................................................

......................242 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 10 ..267 5-4-3 RULE .................................. and Incremental Backups ..........274 TCP/IP PORTS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................257 Misbehaving Protocols ............................................................................................................267 COAXIAL CABLE TYPES ....237 Encryption...........................263 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 11 .............................................................. Inc.238 Disaster Recovery .................267 ETHERNET CABLING ............257 Cable Problems.....................................................232 Blocking Port Numbers....................................232 Firewalls ...................................................................259 NIC Indicator Lights ........................................................234 Volumes..............................................................................................................270 IRQ ASSIGNMENTS ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................230 SECURITY TECHNIQUES ........................................250 Hardware Networking Tools...................................................................................................................................................................................................................234 Full....................................................................260 Name Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................................................269 IBM CABLE TYPES (TOKEN RING) ......273 SUBNET MASKING .................................................................................................275 Specialized Solutions.............................................................................................232 Backup Options................... vii ...................................................264 APPENDIX A – TECH SUMMARY ......................................................................................243 CHAPTER 11 – TROUBLESHOOTING A NETWORK ...................................................................................................................239 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............255 TROUBLESHOOTING SCENARIOS ........................................................................236 PASSWORD PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES .................................................250 Hardware Troubleshooting Tools......................................251 MAINTAINING AND TROUBLESHOOTING NETWORKS ..................................................................X STANDARDS..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................234 Fault Tolerance and RAID........................260 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .............................................................264 CONCLUSION ........ Differential.....269 IEEE 802............................................................................................................................................................Table of Contents User-level Security................................................................................................271 OSI MODEL ....232 Backing up Data .......................................................................................................229 Share-level Security ...........................275 TCP/IP UTILITIES ................................................................245 BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................................260 Performance...............................245 NETWORKING AND TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS ............233 Backup Software ............................................................................234 Fault Tolerance and Power ...................................................................239 Viruses.268 UTP CABLE CATEGORIES .....................................................

.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 283 CCITT .................................................................................................................. 283 ANSI..................................................... 321 INDEX ............................................................................................................................... 276 TRANSMISSION MEDIA ......... 284 APPENDIX D – HOW TO REGISTER FOR THE EXAM............................... 323 viii Specialized Solutions........................................ 285 APPENDIX E – GLOSSARY.......................................................................Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TOPOLOGY REVIEW ....................................................................................................... 278 APPENDIX B – USEFUL WEB SITES .................................................................... Inc.............................................................................. 287 APPENDIX F – CHAPTER REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ......................................................................................... 285 TO REGISTER FOR THE NETWORK+ EXAMS ............................................................................................. 278 TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS ......................................... 319 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 10.......................................................... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED............................................................................ ................................................................................................................................... 281 NOVELL ................................................ 283 IEEE .......... 304 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 3........................ 281 COMPUSERVE ......................................... 284 SAG ..................... 316 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 8................................................................................... 311 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 6...................................................................................................................................... 320 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 11......................................................................................................... 306 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 4................................................................................................................................................................. 303 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 2................................................................. 315 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 7................................................. 303 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 1.................................................... OTHER HELPFUL SITES .............................................................................................................................. 281 MICROSOFT: ......... 281 APPENDIX C – NETWORK STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS ................................................................................................................ 284 ISO..................................................................... 318 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 9............................................................................................................................................. 283 EIA ..................... 309 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 5..............................................................................................................................................

We are committed to always be on the leading edge of new computer environment training products. Inc. To see other Specialized Solutions. cost-effective programs that are customized to suit your needs.About Specialized Solutions About Specialized Solutions Welcome to Specialized Solutions. Specialized Solutions. Our highly skilled staff of computer and educational professionals are dedicated to delivering high quality. Inc. is dedicated to providing the computer professional the highest level of self-study training and certification materials the industry has to offer. We thank you for choosing our company as your resource for Information Technology SelfStudy Training.’s Network+ training and certification course. Inc. We strive to provide training programs that far exceed the expectations of our customers. course offerings. One hundred percent customer satisfaction and unmatched customer service is always our commitment to the computer professional. ix . please visit us at: www. We will always provide a quality product to customers at a price that is within reach of most computer professionals. Inc.com Specialized Solutions.specializedsolutions.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide x Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

or as a textbook in a classroom environment. We hope you enjoy your Network+ training program. Inc. We have carefully prepared this multi-media training material to provide you with the needed information in a logical. Inc. and Digital Video Studio Professionals. 1 . Network+ video training series. our success is directly tied to the success our students have with our training programs. Computer Graphics Experts. easy to follow format. Technical Writers. Remember.Introduction Introduction This Training Guide is designed to meet all of the Network+ exam objectives. as a stand-alone textbook. It can be used in conjunction with the Specialized Solutions. We are here to help with all of your training and certification needs! Specialized Solutions. Our staff consists of Microsoft Certified Professionals. Technical Editors. at Specialized Solutions.

.” The objectives are weighted in the following manner: NETWORK+ CERTIFICATION DOMAIN AREAS 1.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide CompTIA Test Objectives for Network+ CompTIA is an acronym for Computing Technology Industry Association “The skills and knowledge measured by this examination are derived from industry-wide job task analysis and validated through an industry wide survey.0 Media & Topologies 2. test objectives and example content. The results of this survey were used in weighing the domains and ensuring that the weighting is representative of the relative importance of the content.0 Network Implementation 4. Example concepts are included to clarify the test objectives and should not be construed as a comprehensive listing of the content of the examination.0 Network Support Total % OF EXAMINATION 20% 20% 25% 35% 100% 2 Specialized Solutions.0 Protocols & Standards 3.” “This examination includes blueprint weighting. Inc.

and cable type) of the following cable standards: • 10BASE-T and 10BASE-FL • 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX • 1000BASE-T.2 Specify the main features of 802. length.2 (Logical Link Control).0 .3 (Ethernet). including: • Speed • Access method (CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance) and CSMA / CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection)) • Topology • Media 1.Introduction The following is a further breakdown of the specific areas covered on the Network+ exam: Domain 1. 1000BASE-CX. 5.4 Recognize the following media connectors and describe their uses: • RJ-11 (Registered Jack) • RJ-45 (Registered Jack) • F-Type • ST (Straight Tip) • SC (Subscriber Connector or Standard Connector) • IEEE 1394 (FireWire) • Fiber LC (Local Connector) • MT-RJ (Mechanical Transfer Registered Jack) • USB (Universal Serial Bus) 1.3 Specify the characteristics (For example: speed. 1000BASE-SX and 1000BASE-LX • 10 GBASE-SR. and FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface) networking technologies.5 (token ring).1 Recognize the following logical or physical network topologies given a diagram. 802. features and functions of the following network components: • Hubs • Switches • Bridges • Routers • Gateways • CSU / DSU (Channel Service Unit / Data Service Unit) Specialized Solutions.11 (wireless). 10 GBASE-LR and 10 GBASE-ER 1. 5e.Media and Topologies – 20% 1. topology. schematic or description: • Star • Bus • Mesh • Ring 1. 802.5 Recognize the following media types and describe their uses: • Category 3.6 Identify the purposes. 3 . and 6 • UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) • STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) • Coaxial cable • SMF (Single Mode Fiber) optic cable • MMF (Multimode Fiber) optic cable 1. 802. Inc.

2.7 Specify the general characteristics (For example: carrier speed.11 (Frequency hopping spread spectrum) • 802. Inc. 2. .2 Identify the seven layers of the OSI (Open Systems Interconnect) model and their functions.11x (Direct sequence spread spectrum) • Infrared • Bluetooth 1.9 Identify and differentiate between the following IP (Internet Protocol) addressing methods: • Static • Dynamic • Self-assigned (APIPA (Automatic Private Internet Protocol Addressing)) 2. 2.10 Define the purpose.8 Identify the differences between private and public network addressing schemes.3 Identify the OSI (Open Systems Interconnect) layers at which the following network components operate: • Hubs • Switches • Bridges • Routers • NICs (Network Interface Card) • WAPs (Wireless Access Point) 2. B and C). function and use of the following protocols used in the TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) suite: • TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) • UDP (User Datagram Protocol) 4 Specialized Solutions.7 Identify the purpose of subnetting. 2. frequency. transmission type and topology) of the following wireless technologies: • 802. interoperability and naming conventions: • IPX / SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange / Sequence Packet Exchange) • NetBEUI (Network Basic Input / Output System Extended User Interface) • AppleTalk / AppleTalk over IP (Internet Protocol) • TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) 2. addressing schemes.6 Identify classful IP (Internet Protocol) ranges and their subnet masks (For example: Class A. IPv6) and the required setting for connections across the Internet.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • NICs (Network Interface Card) • ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) adapters • WAPs (Wireless Access Point) • Modems • Transceivers (media converters) • Firewalls 1. 2.8 Identify factors which affect the range and speed of wireless service (For example: interference.1 Identify a MAC (Media Access Control) address and its parts.5 Identify the components and structure of IP (Internet Protocol) addresses (IPv4.4 Differentiate between the following network protocols in terms of routing.0 – Protocols and Standards – 20% 2. 2. Domain 2. antenna type and environmental factors).

Introduction • FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • SFTP (Secure File Transfer Protocol) • TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) • SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) • HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) • HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) • POP3 / IMAP4 (Post Office Protocol version 3 / Internet Message Access Protocol version 4) • Telnet • SSH (Secure Shell) • ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) • ARP / RARP (Address Resolution Protocol / Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) • NTP (Network Time Protocol) • NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) • SCP (Secure Copy Protocol) • LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) • IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) • LPR (Line Printer Remote) 2. LPD (Line Printer Daemon) and Samba).15 Identify the basic characteristics of the following internet access technologies: • xDSL (Digital Subscriber Line) • Broadband Cable (Cable modem) • POTS / PSTN (Plain Old Telephone Service / Public Switched Telephone Network) • Satellite • Wireless Specialized Solutions.14 Identify the basic characteristics (For example: speed. WINS (Windows Internet Name Service). NAT (Network Address Translation). SMB (Server Message Block). 2. AFP (Apple File Protocol). ICS (Internet Connection Sharing). Zeroconf (Zero configuration).12 Identify the well-known ports associated with the following commonly used services and protocols: • 20 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • 21 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • 22 SSH (Secure Shell) • 23 Telnet • 25 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) • 53 DNS (Domain Name Service) • 69 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) • 80 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) • 110 POP3 (Post Office Protocol version 3) • 119 NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) • 123 NTP (Network Time Protocol) • 143 IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol version 4) • 443 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) 2.11 Define the function of TCP / UDP (Transmission Control Protocol / User Datagram Protocol) ports. capacity and media) of the following WAN (Wide Area Networks) technologies: • Packet switching • Circuit switching • ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) • FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface) • T1 (T Carrier level 1) / E1 / J1 • T3 (T Carrier level 3) / E3 / J3 • OCx (Optical Carrier) • X.25 2.13 Identify the purpose of network services and protocols (For example: DNS (Domain Name Service). SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). NFS (Network File System). Inc. 5 . 2.

benefits and characteristics of using a firewall. authentication. 3.4 Given a remote connectivity scenario comprised of a protocol. 3. RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service).18 Identify authentication protocols (For example: CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol).8 Identify the main characteristics of VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks).1 Identify the basic capabilities (For example: client support.3 Identify the appropriate tool for a given wiring task (For example: wire crimper.9 Identify the main characteristics and purpose of extranets and intranets.0 Network Implementation – 25% 3.17 Identify the following security protocols and describe their purpose and function: • IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) • L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) • SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) • WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) Continued on the next page… Continued from the previous page… • WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) • 802. benefits and characteristics of using a proxy service.7 Given a connectivity scenario. Domain 3. 6 Specialized Solutions. interoperability. .5 Identify the purpose. determine the impact on network functionality of a particular security implementation (For example: port blocking / filtering. MS-CHAP (Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol).16 Define the function of the following remote access protocols and services: • RAS (Remote Access Service) • PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) • SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) • PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) • PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) • VPN (Virtual Private Network) • RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) 2. application support and security) of the following server operating systems to access network resources: • UNIX / Linux / Mac OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 3. and physical connectivity. file and print services. 3. punch down tool or tone generator). network protocols and peer and server services). 3.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 2. authentication and encryption). 3. 3. Kerberos and EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)). Includes connection to the following servers: • UNIX / Linux / MAC OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 3.2 Identify the basic capabilities needed for client workstations to connect to and use network resources (For example: media. configure the connection.6 Identify the purpose. an authentication scheme. PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). media tester / certifier.1x 2. Inc.

0 Network Support – 35% 4. mesh or ring) and including a network diagram. print services. physical connectivity and SOHO (Small Office / Home Office) router).6 Given a scenario. interference. 4.11 Identify the purpose and characteristics of fault tolerance: • Power • Link redundancy • Storage • Services 3. 4. benefits and characteristics of using antivirus software.5 Given a troubleshooting scenario between a client and the following server environments. 4. 3. identify the cause of a stated problem (For example: bad media. DNS (Domain Name Service) and WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)) for network resources and users. 4. identify the cause of a stated problem: • UNIX / Linux / Mac OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 4.1 Given a troubleshooting scenario. protocol configuration.7 Given a troubleshooting scenario involving a network with a particular physical topology (For example: bus. adding or removing network services (For example: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). Inc.4 Given a troubleshooting scenario involving a client accessing remote network services. identify the utility and interpret the output. select the appropriate network utility from the following: • Tracert / traceroute • ping • arp • netstat • nbtstat • ipconfig / ifconfig • winipcfg • nslookup / dig 4.10 Identify the purpose.2 Given output from a network diagnostic utility (For example: those utilities listed in objective 4.Introduction 3. interpret visual indicators (For example: link LEDs (Light Emitting Diode) and collision LEDs (Light Emitting Diode)) to determine the nature of a stated problem.1). identify the cause of the problem (For example: file services. 4. warm and cold sites Domain 4. Specialized Solutions.8 Given a network troubleshooting scenario involving an infrastructure (For example: wired or wireless) problem. identify the network area affected and the cause of the stated failure. determine the impact of modifying. authentication failure. star.3 Given a network scenario.12 Identify the purpose and characteristics of disaster recovery: • Backup / restore • Offsite storage • Hot and cold spares • Hot. 7 . network hardware or environment).

.9 Given a network problem scenario. Select the most probable cause 5. Identify the symptoms and potential causes 2. Establish what has changed 4. Identify the affected area 3. Implement an action plan and solution including potential effects 6. Test the result 7. This strategy can include the following steps: 1. select an appropriate course of action based on a logical troubleshooting strategy. Inc. Document the solution and process 8 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 4. Identify the results and effects of the solution 8.

Bill says. Pause and rewind to review the concepts as often as necessary. it may seem so. CCSI. Inc. Bill has been in the computer industry for over 15 years. To get the best results from your training. In addition he holds the CompTIA certifications of A+. He is certified as an MCT. as well as “Designing Security for Windows Server 2003 Network” for Exam Cram2. not all concepts and functions can be performed on a workstation. MCSA. MCSE. Bill is an enthusiastic. Complete the questions and exercises at the end of each segment of this study guide and in the textbook. Alabama. Bill now runs his own company as an independent contractor in Birmingham. use a study plan. Bill has written the “MCDST Study Guide” for Sybex Inc. Your Video Instructor Your video instructor is Bill Ferguson. Hands-on experience is best. Server+. if this is your first exposure to networking. Bill made his transition to Certified Technical Trainer in 1997 with ExecuTrain. Suggestion: • • • • • • • Watch each video segment with the study guide in hand. Network+. Use the Practice Exam Simulator to test your knowledge. 9 . results oriented computer specialist who has extensive knowledge of Microsoft networks. MCDST. This combination of resources will provide a thorough understanding of the concept or function being presented. In addition. Make notes in the study guide as necessary for your understanding.Introduction Study Plan Strategies The material in Network+ is not extremely complicated. and Security+. such as the one suggested below: You can maximize your multi-media learning experience by using all of the courseware materials as you study for your certification. “My job is to understand the material so well that I can make it easier for my students to learn than it was for me to learn. and CCNA. However.” Specialized Solutions. MCP+I. teaching classes for most of the national training companies and some regional training companies. Practice the function on your computer. Use the “Help” button where available. Originally in technical sales and sales management with Sprint.

com). Inc. A typical candidate would have A+ certification or equivalent knowledge. You can take the test at any Virtual University Enterprises testing center (vue. You can also call VUE at 877-551-7587 or Thomson Prometric at 888-8956116. but A+ certification is not required. watching. Who may take the test? Network+ is open to anyone who wants to take the test. Since most of us learn in different ways. The Network+ exam was launched worldwide April 30. You may be surprised at how near you are to a testing center! Evaluate your learning aptitudes. The exam is targeted for technicians with 18-24 months experience in the IT industry. Read through these suggested steps and modify it as necessary to meet your needs. hearing or doing)? What time of day is best for you (night person/morning person)? What are your limits before you get bored (or fall asleep)? 10 Specialized Solutions. This method is based on utilization of several learning skills. YOU’VE COMPLETED THE 1ST STEP BY SELECTING SPECIALIZED SOLUTIONS TO BE YOUR TRAINING PARTNER! Schedule the test for a few weeks from now so that you will have a guidepost that is constantly reminding you that you need to study the material. • • • How do you learn best (reading. This helps to ensure that a person who has earned the certification actually understands the concepts and functions of networking versus simply memorizing definitions.com) or any Thomson Prometric testing center (2test. . Certification exams are becoming more and more comprehensive. CONGRATULATIONS.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide How to Take the Test Passing a certification exam takes more than just skimming through a book. How to Prepare to Ensure Exam Success There are many ways to prepare for the exam. The Network+ test is currently available throughout the world in English. German. there is no one method that will work for everyone. 1999. Step 1 – Prepare for the Training Obtain the best possible materials and instruction you can find. There are no specific requirements. The following is a suggestion you may find helpful. French and Japanese. You can locate a testing center and schedule the test on the web. Prometric and VUE testing centers administer the exam. except payment of the test fee.

Make an appointment with yourself. Put it on your calendar and keep it! The time it takes you to read the text may be different from the time needed to watch the video or do the practice exercises. Re-read the test and review the video presentation. Based on your time to learn (and your schedule). Read through the text to get an understanding of the material. Your objective is to own the information (make it part of you). If you don’t have any free time – MAKE SOME! Be committed to your plan! Step 2 – Do the Coursework (Text and Videos/CDs) Your objective is to get an understanding of the material and the scope of the course. If you need to. Complete the entire course one time through using the following methods: • • Break the course down into bite size chunks (a chapter or two at a time). go though the entire course again. Specialized Solutions. It is not necessary to memorize or even understand the material at this point. You will also “pick up” some concepts that you missed the first time through. Focus on the areas that you had trouble with the first time. Watch the videos that correspond to the chapters you read.Introduction Make a plan to learn. 11 . you want to begin to understand. just get a feel for it. Inc. • Complete the course a second time. Evaluate your active schedule – determine when you have some free time. Review the video presentation one more time if necessary. At this time. This workbook will make this task much easier. What you learned in the later chapters may help you get a better understanding of the material the second time through. You will be surprised at how much more sense it makes this time. Use the rewind button as often as necessary. set aside the time to learn.

The test administrator will show you to your test computer and will handle any preparations necessary to start the testing tool and display the exam on the computer. which explains the rules you will be expected to comply with during the test. You will be asked to sign the form. including one photo ID. Evaluate the questions you missed. You may not use a laptop computer or have any notes or printed material with you during the exam session.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Step 3 – Prepare for the Network+ Exam Place the practice exam simulator in your computer’s CD-ROM and select the exam you wish to take or practice with. • • • • 12 Specialized Solutions. If you have never taken one of these computergenerated exams. indicating that you understand the regulations and will comply with them. You will be required to show two forms of identification. You will be provided with a set amount of scratch paper or a small dry erase board for use during the exam. (the sample test is unrelated to the Network+ exam) to give you a feel for how the test is conducted. . You will have the opportunity to take a sample test. (such as a driver’s license or company security ID) before you take the exam. It is a closed book exam. All scratch paper or boards are collected at the end of the exam. • • • • Did you understand the questions? Did you misinterpret or read more into it than was there? Did you understand the material? Did you read the whole question? Study the areas that you are weak in. Inc. Continue retaking the practice exams and studying the areas that require improvement until you are consistently scoring in the 90% range on the practice exam. Step 4 – Take the Certification Exam As you prepare for your certification exam it will be helpful to know what to expect when you arrive at the testing center: • • You will be asked to sign the logbook upon arrival and upon departure. it might be a good idea to take advantage of this feature. The test administrator will give you a Testing Center Regulations form.

If you’re not quite sure. An unanswered question is always wrong! Stay calm. jotting down their notes on the scratch paper that the testing facility provides. a Network+ Training & Test Preparation Guide and a practice exam simulator.) If you don’t receive a passing score: If you do not receive a passing score.Some people find it helpful to study the memorization type materials. you are given the ability to skip a question. self-study training system. Do not read too much into the question. You will also receive a printed Examination Score Report indicating your pass or fail status from the test administrator. but be sure to read it in its entirety. Inc.Introduction HINT . put in extra study time in the objective areas that need improvement. Trust your first instinct about an answer! Go back and answer any marked or unanswered questions. (At the end of the test when you have the opportunity to review. Make sure ALL questions are answered BEFORE you exit the test!) When you’ve completed the test and exit the system. The course contains five instructor led CD-ROMs. You will have plenty of time as long as you use it wisely. Usually. marked or skipped. or if you are unclear about what you should do. skip it. (such as the RAID and SCSI Information) just before entering the exam site and then immediately upon starting the test. If you know the answer. Before you begin the exam the test administrator will tell you what to do when you complete the exam. If the administrator does not do this. you can see which questions are not answered. The testing center will notify CompTIA of your score and they will confirm your certification with you. Make sure to note if it is a multiple answer question and select the correct amount of answers. (You don’t need to send them the score report. If you positively don’t know the answer. Specialized Solutions. answer the question. Before retaking the exam. guess. Sometimes later questions will help answer earlier questions. 13 . ask the administrator BEFORE beginning the exam. mark it and come back to it. Keep track of the time and pace yourself. If you don’t know the answer. It lists your score by objective. you are given immediate online pass/fail notification and your score. you may call an authorized testing center to schedule a time to retake the exam. At the end of the exam you will be able to see which ones are answered. which will enable you to see which areas require improvement if you didn’t pass. mark a question or answer a question. Please note: YOU MUST PAY FOR EACH EXAM RETAKE! About This Course This Specialized Solutions Network+ course is a multi-media.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The Video Chapters Include: CD 1: Introduction and Overview Network Topologies Network Technologies Cable Standards Media Connectors CD 2: Media Types Network Components Wireless Technologies Protocols and Standards The OSI Model IP Addressing CD 3: Ports Services WAN Internet Access Remote Access Security Protocols CD 4: Server Operating Systems Client Connectivity Tools for Networking Firewalls Proxy Service Network Connectivity Virtual Local Area Networks Antivirus Software Fault Tolerance Disaster Recovery CD 5: Troubleshooting Network Utilities Troubleshooting Network Services Troubleshooting Topologies Troubleshooting Strategy Preparation for a Certification Test 14 Specialized Solutions. .

Specialized Solutions. Inc. 15 .Introduction This study guide is divided into 11 chapters. It is designed to be an effective study tool that will help you retain the information that is presented in the course.

.

This section focuses on what a network is and why they are used so extensively in today’s computer environment. Sharing applications ensures that all users are using the same programs (and versions) and makes it much easier to manage documents. peripherals. Inc. 17 . But for our purposes. a central file server can keep unauthorized users from accessing confidential or sensitive files. You will also be able to identify the two major network configurations and describe the difference between a LAN and a WAN. Another advantage of networking is the ability to have a centralized location for document storage. Saving files to one location (usually the file server) makes it easy for everyone to gain access to the files that they need. A central file server also allows for an easier backup strategy to be implemented. Additionally. Specialized Solutions. It is very important that. After completing this chapter you will understand why networking is important and how it relates to the computer environment. It is much less expensive to purchase one network printer to serve everyone’s needs (or one department’s depending on the size of the network) than to purchase a printer for every user.) Most companies network their office computers for the simple reason of economics. users can access programs. An affiliation of broadcasting companies is also called a network (you’ve heard of NBC?).” Real estate professionals would think of networking as a means to make more sales through talking to people about what they do. you understand exactly what a network is. Introduction to Networking There are many different uses for the term “networking. files. and peripherals without using what is fondly known as the “sneaker net. as a networking professional.” (Taking a floppy disk with the information that you want to share or print to the computer that can provide the desired service. Benefits of Networking Computers The main reason that we network computers is to be able to share resources.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals This chapter introduces you to the basics of networking. a network is a system of connecting independent computers so that users may share data. and applications (resources). Through networking.

A WAN can connect networks from building to building or across the world. the speed of communication between the computers is typically much faster in a LAN. When LANs are connected they create a WAN. it is still considered a LAN. A LAN is the basic (and smallest) starting point of any computer network. The Internet is the world’s largest WAN. Also. 18 Specialized Solutions. . The main distinction between a LAN and a WAN is that a LAN is confined to a limited area whereas a WAN has no geographical limits. or if its hundreds of computers spread throughout a high-rise office building.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wide Area Networks (WAN) There are two basic structures of network types: • • LAN (Local Area Networks) WAN (Wide Area Networks) LAN WAN A network is classified into one of these groups based upon its size and function. Inc. Even if the network is merely two computers connected by a cable to share information.

Client/Server Networking In a server-based network there is a dedicated computer called a server that is the central location of resources. A large network may have more than one server. log onto the server to access the files or applications that they wish to use. one for applications (application server). one for printing (print server). if that same workstation happened to be connected to a printer that another user wanted to access. A workstation is a computer workspace that is connected to a network. The Internet has replaced most MANs today. A server is a high-end computer that has a very large amount of storage. Servers and clients are roles played by computers and users as they interact in their daily activity.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals There is actually a third classification of networks: a MAN (Metropolitan Area Network). It is important to know what a MAN is. The mainframe is always the server and anyone who accesses it is always the client. that access would cause the workstation to become a server. network security. Inc. configuration and management may be more challenging. including applications. but they are not common. since it would be serving the needs of a user (or client). The Client/Server Relationship A network is classified by how it shares information. Users. Since the client/server network is the most common choice of businesses today. The disadvantages are greater expense and the complexity of installation. it is the role they play in the dynamic world of desktops and laptops that changes. it would appear that the advantages outweigh the disadvantages. However. The only true client/server relationship where the roles do not change is the mainframe computer. Also. A network can be either a peer-topeer network or a server-based network. efficiency in backing up the data. and expandability. 19 . when the user is getting information from the server. or a mail server (E-mail). also known as clients. These terms are not interchangeable. there may be a dedicated server for file storage (called a file server). The advantages of this type of network are central administration. For example. including hard disk space and RAM. A mainframe will handle all the functions. A MAN is larger than a LAN but is limited to a metropolitan area such as a city or county. Specialized Solutions. that is capable of servicing clients who access shared files. and is a client.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Client/Server Network Peer-to-Peer Networking In a peer-to-peer network there are no separate computers that act as servers. This type of network is most often used when fewer than ten computers are involved. Inc. In a peer-to-peer network all computers are equal.g. Also. All of the computers on the network can act as either clients or servers depending upon the needs of the user. Windows 95 and up) they will be able to communicate via the network. Peer-to-Peer Network 20 Specialized Solutions. and as long as each computer has an operating system capable of client/sharing (e. A peer-to-peer network is simple and inexpensive to install. network security is unreliable. . The computers are simply cabled together. a peer-to-peer network is difficult to expand. A disadvantage of the peer-to-peer network is that since users are responsible for their own systems’ security.

design. they do not move the transmissions along. The nodes (computers or devices connected to the network) are all connected along a single cable. The Bus topology is a passive topology. or segment. This means that the more computers that are connected to a Bus the slower the network becomes as devices are waiting to transmit or retransmit. An electronic signal is sent out on the cable to all of the devices connected on the network. refers to its physical layout. map. Different topologies have different cabling requirements. 21 . Devices only listen for data being transmitted. The signal is sent out on the cable and it travels from one end of the cable to the other. NICs. you will need to know how to choose the network topology that will best suit the needs of your network. Setting up a network requires more than just cabling the computers together. the signal would travel back and forth along the cable and cause what is known as signal bounce. or topology. While the signal is bouncing back and forth. and even how the cabling is run through a building. how the computers will talk to each other (protocols). Only one computer at a time can transmit data on a Bus network or signals will collide and the transmission will fail. backbone. (Network Interface Cards. As a network professional. are all determined by the topology used. or diagram. This cable is called a trunk. Specialized Solutions. it prevents other devices from sending data. The type and capabilities of the equipment that will be used. the network will go down and devices will not be able to communicate with each other. a component called a terminator is installed at each end of the cable. Devices on a Bus topology communicate by sending data to a specific address on the network (a device’s address). future growth needs. and how a network will be managed are all potential problems that need to be considered when planning a network. A terminator absorbs the signal and stops signal bounce. Inc. In a Bus network. However.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Basic Network Structure (Topology) A network’s basic structure. only the device whose address matches the address encoded in the signal will respond to the signal. scheme. also called Network Adapter Cards). if the cable breaks. connectors. To stop signal bounce. There are three standard topologies that a network professional needs to understand: • • • Bus Topology Star Topology Ring Topology Bus Topology The simplest and probably the most used form of network topologies is the Bus topology (sometimes called a linear bus). If not prevented.

the entire network will go down. Star Topology Ring Topology In a Ring topology. There are no ends to terminate.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Star Topology In a Star topology. It requires a lot more cable than the Bus topology. . Inc. the rest of the network will still continue to function. If the hub fails. all devices are connected to a central point called a hub. but the advantage is that if one computer (or the cable that connects one computer to the hub) goes down. the devices are connected in one continuous circle of cable. The signal is actually boosted and sent on along the cable when it passes through the computers on the network. 22 Specialized Solutions. however. A disadvantage is that if one computer fails. The data is transmitted around the loop in one direction and passes through each computer on the network. it can affect the entire network. The Ring is not a passive topology like the Bus topology.

we have been discussing physical topologies. In these networks. Inc. This is very expensive to install but it is extremely reliable because of the redundant paths. some Ethernet networks today are wired using a using multiple hubs. These are known as Hybrid topologies. These are the methods in which a network is actually wired. This gives us a physical star topology. Token Ring networks are physical stars and logical rings. Also. A logical topology. the ring is actually in a special type of hub called a Multistation Access Unit (MSAU).Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals With IBM Token Ring networks. is how the network actually works. The Star Ring topology is similar to the Star Bus. For example. 23 . So far. Hybrid Topologies The Star Bus topology is a hybrid of the Star and Bus topologies. today’s networking professional will encounter many network topologies that are combinations of the above configurations. they operate between the hubs like a bus topology and are therefore a logical bus. on the other hand. but the hubs in a Star Ring are connected in a star pattern by a main hub. Mesh Topology In the Mesh topology every device is connected to every other device by separate cables and has redundant paths. It consists of several Star topology networks that are linked using linear Bus trunks. Before you can understand some of these special topologies. However. a computer can fail and not prevent the network from functioning. Special Topologies In addition to the above topologies. you will need to know the difference between a physical and a logical topology. Specialized Solutions. You will be able to see a physical topology.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless Topology A Wireless topology is one in which there aren’t any cables connecting the network devices to the LAN or one which the LAN uses wireless technology between access points. 24 Specialized Solutions. . . the topology of a wireless network is that of an “invisible star”. Since each computer has its own connection to the wireless access point (WAP). The benefits of wireless technology will be discussed at length in Chapter 4 of this book.

Inc.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Specialized Solutions. 25 .

” Token Passing Token passing is the method of sending data around a Token Ring topology. A token is passed along from device to device until it is received by a computer that needs to transmit. Multiple Access means that more than one computer 26 Specialized Solutions. we create kind of a “party line”. The two most common network standards are distinguished by their respective media access methods. Inc. This is based on the media or wiring of the network. The method that is used for an individual device to be able to use the network party line is called media access. they are called Token Ring and Ethernet. . The sending machine then creates a new token to send around the ring that will be grabbed by the next device that wants to transmit data on the network. only one device at a time can communicate on the network. Another aspect of networks that is related to topology is the way in which the network is accessed by individual devices. The sending computer grabs the token and encodes it with addressing information for the receiving computer and sends it out on the ring. The receiving computer then sends the token back to the sending computer to let it know that it received the message. Carrier Sense means the network card listens to the cable for a quiet period during which it can send messages. It is passed along from device to device until it arrives at the computer whose addressing information matches the one encoded on the token. Token Passing Ethernet Ethernet uses a system known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Access The topologies that we have been discussing describe the way in which the computers and other devices on a network are connected. and the message is delivered. With several devices connected to one media. Since there is only one token. We will also cover access methods in more detail in the chapter “Network Protocols and Standards.

Inc. 27 . Collision Detection is the ability to detect whether messages have collided in transit (neither message will arrive at their destination and both will be retransmitted).Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals can be connected to the same cable. Fast Ethernet works on the same principals as Ethernet but operates at 10 times the speed of the original. Collision Detection Fast Ethernet Fast Ethernet was developed to meet the increasing demands on networks. Ethernet transmits at 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet transmits at 100 Mbps. Specialized Solutions.

they are called MSAUs (Multiple Station Access Units). The most common name used with Ethernet is a hub or a concentrator. Passive hubs do not require any electrical power to function. . Essentially. Passive Hubs A passive hub acts as a connection point only. since they provide a common location for connecting the cabling of a network. Just remember. Passive Hub – Patch Panel 28 Specialized Solutions. Today.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Hubs and Concentrators More and more networks are using hubs and they are pretty much standard equipment in today’s networks. not all hubs are the same and you must use one that is designed to meet the needs of the network. Signals pass through the hub but are not regenerated or amplified. Inc. With a Token Ring. they are all the same. Hubs can be classified as either passive or active. hubs come in a variety of names depending on their function.

This type type of hub requires electrical power to function. 2) Centralized monitoring of traffic and activity along with diagnostic capabilities are available. They have many advantages over other types of networks: 1) If a cable breaks only the portion of the network on that segment is affected. 3) A variety of cable types can be accommodated. 29 . An active hub regenerates or amplifies a signal when it is passed through.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Active Hubs Most of the hubs used today are active hubs. Specialized Solutions. 4) Expanding the network can be easily accomplished by using hubs. Active Hub Hub-Based Networks Hub-based networks are increasing in popularity. Inc.

30 Specialized Solutions. The two types of networks are LANs and WANs. It is important to know the differences between these two classifications and the advantages and disadvantages of each. The three main types of topology are bus. and the Internet is the world’s largest WAN. If you are having trouble with any of these concepts. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. Topology is a term we use to describe the logical shape of the connection of computers in a network. go back and review the chapter again. Inc. star.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary In this chapter we learned that the main reason for networking (as it relates to computers) is the sharing of resources. and ring. . A WAN is not geographically limited and typically has greater speed of communication than a WAN. We also learned about the two basic network classifications of networks: the peer-to-peer network and the server-based network. A LAN is the smallest form and is the basic building block for larger networks.

Keyword Active Hub Application Application Server Bus Topology Client Data Fax Server File Server Hub Hybrid Topology LAN Mail Server MAN Media Mesh Topology Network Network Administrator Passive Hub Peer-to-peer Peripheral Print Server Definition Specialized Solutions. 31 .Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc.

.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword Resources Ring Topology Security Server Server-based Sharing Star Topology Token Passing User WAN Wireless Topology Definition 32 Specialized Solutions. Inc.

Name some advantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. 8. Name some advantages of a Server-based network. 10. Name two media access methods. Name some disadvantages of a Server-based network. 7. Specialized Solutions. Name the three basic topologies. 33 . 11. Name some advantages of having centralized documents.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Review Questions . What is the difference between a physical and logical topology? 12.Chapter 1 1. 5. Inc. What is the main reason for networking computers? 3. 9. What are the key differences between a local area network (LAN) and a wide area network (WAN)? 2. Name some disadvantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. What is a “sneaker net”? 4. What does MAN stand for and why is it no longer in use? 6.

.

The main objective is to make sure that the hardware and the applications are all compatible with each other.Network Operating Systems (NOS) Up to this point we have focused on the design aspects of networking. This chapter is all about the various operating systems with which a networking professional needs to be familiar. word-processing. Today. When we refer to the operating system in this chapter. we are referencing the built-in network operating system component. as well as the operating system. Hardware resources such as RAM. if you don’t have the software to run it. In this chapter we will explore the features and benefits of the more popular network operating systems. what we are really talking about are network operating systems. it is just a pile of metal and plastic. processor time. spreadsheet. network operating systems were designed to operate on top of an existing operating system.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) Chapter 2 . 35 . but without an operating system. When we are talking about operating systems. Inc. most networked computers run software that was specifically designed to run both the computer’s stand-alone functions as well as its networking functions. Most of today’s client and server operating systems have a built-in network operating system. it will just sit there. You can get it all set up and turn on the power. Even if you have the best network design composed of the best hardware in the universe. The differences between server and client operating systems as well as preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking will be covered as well. The operating system is also responsible for the running of applications (e. Specialized Solutions. and database programs). We will also discuss their minimum requirements and interoperability capabilities. A computer needed two sets of software in order to function in a networking environment. Network operating systems (NOS) are specialized operating systems designed to integrate computers in a networking environment. What is an Operating System? Not that long ago. hard disk space. and peripherals are all controlled by the operating system (the software).g.

Most operating systems appear to be performing multiple tasks by alternating between tasks until they are all completed. In non-preemptive multitasking. A true multitasking (multi-processing) operating system is able to process as many tasks as it has processors. the processor is never taken away from a task. Non-preemptive Multitasking Multitasking.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Preemptive vs. Preemptive multitasking began with Windows 95 and the Intel Pentium processor. . It is used on all of the latest operating systems. 36 Specialized Solutions. Inc. Preemptive multitasking means that the operating system can take control of the processor without a task’s permission. Non-preemptive multitasking is when the task decides when it is done with the processor. means that an operating system has the ability to perform more than one task at a time. put simply.

Inc.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) What is a Network Operating System (NOS)? A NOS is an operating system that includes other software. 37 . and you have a working network. It is well-suited for editing home movies. Windows 95/98 Windows 95 and Windows 98 are operating systems that include a network operating system. Most of the operating systems in use today are already capable of managing this type of network. With NT the only drawback is that you will not be able to utilize NT’s advanced security features because Windows 95 is not compatible with the NTFS file system. Windows 95/98 is also able to better identify NICs. Windows 95/98 also performs very well as a client with both the NetWare and Windows NT operating systems. to communicate with other computers over a network. It protects critical files and will allow you to revert your system back to normal if anything goes wrong. all you have to do is share any directories and peripherals to the network. A peer-to-peer LAN is not a client/server-based network. It is certainly the most economical of the networking choices. To install a NIC with Windows 95/98 is as simple as installing the card. turning on the computer and answering questions. Usually this type of network only shares files and peripheral devices. Specialized Solutions. Their new graphical interface and networking capabilities make them a vast improvement over their predecessors. and archiving music. Microsoft Client. Peer-to-peer LANs are an excellent choice for the network that has less than ten computers and no need of security (such as a small office environment). All shared resources are arranged on a hierarchical basis and displayed in Network Neighborhood. They use an icon called the Network Neighborhood for desktop access of the network. moving photos to the Web. Windows ME Windows ME is the client operating system that has followed the Windows 9x operating systems. Novell NetWare. Instead. It is necessary to install the requester software (NetWare Client32 for Windows 95) with NetWare. Usually only NICs and cabling will need to be purchased to implement this kind of network. such as BSD UNIX. Peer-to-Peer LANs Many smaller networking environments utilize the peer-to-peer network configuration. or a similar program. Help and support is improved from Windows 98 and home networking is made easier than ever. Plug-n-Play technology has also made installing a NIC much easier. Then. each workstation may act as either a client or a server depending upon whether it is accessing resources on another workstation or if another workstation is accessing its resources.

It also supports Microsoft Management Console (MMC) and group policies. It also uses System Restore. It allows for faster user switching. EFS (Encrypting File System). It. It features file protection. remote OS installation. which allows for safety when installing additional software or making changes to the computer’s configuration. . is equipped to be networked easily. IPsec and Kerberos support. peer-topeer support for Windows 9x and NT. Inc. Windows XP Home Windows XP Home edition is the newest edition of Microsoft’s OS for home users. driver certification. like ME. Other Peer-to-Peer LANs The following table lists other peer-to-peer LAN software and their manufacturers that the networking professional may come across in real life but are unlikely to be on the test: 38 Specialized Solutions. like the rest of the client OS software mentioned here.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Professional is the client counterpart to Windows 2000 server. multilingual support. a simplified visual design.

Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) Software Name 10NetPlus AppleTalk Easy Net GV LAN OS LANsmark LANsoft LANStep LANtastic NET/30 Network OSCBIS OS/2 Warp Personal NetWare POWERLan ReadyLink WEB Manufacturer Digital Communications Associates. Inc. However. Inc. the purpose of a network operating system is to connect all devices on a network (computers and peripherals) and to coordinate their usability. Apple Computer LanMark Grapevine LAN Products D-Link Systems ACCTon Technology Hayes Microcomputer Products Artisoft Invisible Software Peachtree IBM Corporation Novell Performance Technology Compex WebCorp Server/Client Software In a peer-to-peer network. it is necessary to have an operating system that can perform in this environment. 39 . Some network operating systems require that different versions are installed depending on whether a computer is the server (provides resources remotely over a network) or a client (uses resources locally). This can also provide accessibility and security for all devices on a network. Specialized Solutions. the computers act as both a client and a server. In a Serverbased network.

However. Unlike most client software. Users are required to enter a password before they can log on and gain access. This 40 Specialized Solutions. They process requests from clients for resources such as files and peripherals. if you were requesting resources or services that exist on a remote server.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide There are two types of networking software that must be considered: • • Client Software Server Software Client Software If you type a command for your stand-alone computer to perform a task. Network security is discussed in greater detail in Chapter 10. the command is processed over the computer’s internal CPU via the computer’s local bus. Server Software As their name implies. The server keeps track of who is logged onto a network and what resources have been (or are being) accessed. the server should be attached to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Most network administrators provide some sort of fault-tolerance system on the server. Some networks even cluster server so that more that one server can share a database of information. They are the storage facility for the bulk of the data in a network environment and as such are an excellent point from which to centrally manage a network. The component that handles these requests is called the redirector. Servers exist to serve. out onto the network. Administrators set up and manage user accounts and passwords. most of the data is stored on the server. the operating system has to have the capability to redirect (forward) the request away from the local bus. . server software includes services for the following: • • • Managing User Accounts Security Data Protection Managing User Accounts Servers make it possible to manage users from a central location. Inc. Security Administrators can set up the accounts to determine who gets privileges to what resources and change them as needed (including denying access). and to the server. At the very least. Data Protection As we already discussed. This makes it an excellent point from which to perform regular backups.

Inc. It does this by assigning drive letters. The purpose of the redirector is to make network resources look like local resources to application programs. which opens the file or transfers the print job to the network printer. 41 . etc. It does not need to know anything about networks. This makes the application program believe that it is simply working with a very large hard drive or with a local printer. Basically. to resources. The Redirector (Requester) The redirector (in Novell NetWare this is called the requester) is responsible for forwarding requests away from the local bus and redirecting them to the server. called drive designators. it is a section of code located in the network operating system that intercepts requests and determines if they are local requests. Specialized Solutions. or if they need to be redirected to the server. If it is a local designator (drive C: for example) the request is passed on to the local bus.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) provides for load balancing of the server resources as well as fault tolerance if one server were to fail. If it is a network designator the request is forwarded to the server.

and account restrictions. Inc. which is like the Internet but within a network or company. non-shareable. Each of them has its own advantages and disadvantages. it was the most popular server operating system.5 is now on the market. Directory and file attributes are used to set the types of access for a file or directory such as viewed. management. Novell NetWare The NetWare operating system has been around for a long time. and file and print services.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide NOS Packages There are a multitude of network operating systems available for use. copied. See Chapter 10 for more information on network security. It is a reliable operating system that provides performance and security. NetWare File Services The NetWare file server hard drive may be mapped to a client and the client machine will recognize the drive as a logical drive and be able to access it as it would any other drive in the computer. but it is losing market share to Microsoft servers every year. time. The earliest version (2. as well as what kind of access they have. NetWare Security The purpose of a network may be to share resources. or through NWADMIN. NetWare provides more than adequate network security by using a combination of approaches. servers. groups. It is Novell’s push to gain market share and is a way of creating an Intranet. With NDS’ single point logon. and volumes is also handled with NDS. In this section. or changed.2) was designed to operate on 286 machines. • NetWare’s popularity is due largely to its ability to provide services across multioperating system environments. It may be installed in either the client or server format. we will take a closer look a some of the more popular ones. Versions 3. Version 4. NetWare Directory Services (NDS) NDS (NetWare Directory Services) is the core of the NetWare operating system. NetWare is based upon the industry standard X500 directory architecture. which is a Windows-based utility. messaging. shared. . Organization of network resources such as users. NetWare is administered through NetADMIN. name service. 42 Specialized Solutions. password. a user may logon from anywhere on the network and gain access with all of their assigned rights and privileges intact.11 is called IntranetWare. Trustee rights regulate which directories and files a user can access. In the past.12 and 4. web-publishing. First. or Pentium machines. login security provides authentication and verification of user name.EXE. deleted. which is a DOS-based utility. Version 6.11 operate on 386. 486. routing. but there will always be data in any network to which access must be restricted. It is a hierarchically organized database that provides security.

The file server and the print server can be the same computer. as well as others.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) NetWare Print Services NetWare Print Services can support up to 256 printers. You can even send messages to everyone in a group. It is compatible with E-mail programs such as Novell’s GroupWise and Microsoft Mail. Inc. 43 . You can send messages to individuals or to groups very easily. or directly to the network. NetWare Message Handling Service (MHS) MHS may be installed on any server and configured to be a network wide E-mail system. NetWare also provides a method of using simple commands to send messages to other users on the network. NetWare Minimum Requirements The following are the minimum installation requirements as specified by Novell for installing their server software: Specialized Solutions. except an individual workstation. Print requests are first routed to the file server. next to the print server. and finally to the printer. Printers may be attached to the server. a workstation.

X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 5: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Pentium Class or higher 64 MB 550 MB 386 or higher 16 MB 105 MB 386 or higher 6 MB 30 MB 286 or higher 2.11 or OS/2 Warp and the NetWare Client32 for OS/2 Macintosh 6.5 MB 20 MB Client Software The client software may be installed on any computer running any of the following: • • • • • 44 DOS 3.X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 3. .1 or later and the NetWare Client32 for DOS MS Windows 3.X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 4.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Version 2.1 or later (Standard or Extended Edition) and the NetWare Client32 for OS/2 OS/2 2.0 or later and the NetWare Client32 for Macintosh OS Specialized Solutions. Inc.0 or later and the NetWare Client32 for DOS OS/2 1.

The NetWare client can be installed with almost any other operating system. Files in Windows may be shared by using a simple file sharing method similar to sharing files on a peer-to-peer network. As we’ve already discussed. Unlike NetWare. The advanced security features of Windows are not available if you choose the DOS file system (FAT . Problems do occur when trying to operate within the Windows NT domain. A disadvantage of this is that anyone not using NTFS cannot recognize NTFS directories. Windows NT has two versions: Server (the server software) and Workstation (the client software). allowing restricted access to individuals or groups. Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System While NetWare was the network operating system of the 80s and early 90s. This makes it more difficult to work in multi-operating system environments. but it does have several advantages.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) NetWare Interoperability As the word implies. interoperability simply means the ability of an operating system to operate with other systems. Specialized Solutions. but Windows NT contains services such as NWLink and Gateway Service for NetWare (GSNW) that allow them to work together effectively. its popularity is being replaced by Microsoft Windows Servers. or No Access may be set on the directory. Full Control. actually evolved from a project that was jointly developed by IBM and Microsoft (OS/2). You must have administrative privileges in order to share anything on a Windows network. another security method must be utilized. which as at the base of all Microsoft’s servers. In order to take maximum advantage of the security features in Windows . Today. Windows File Services Like NetWare. Change. NetWare is extremely efficient at operating with other systems. Windows combines the operating system and the network operating system into one. Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003. 45 . It is possible to use both the NTFS and FAT file systems as long as they are in different partitions on the hard drive. The attributes such as Read. Windows NT Advanced Server in 1993. Inc. the Windows servers may be configured to store each workstation’s directories in order to provide centralized data management and backups.File Allocation Table) during installation. Server is much more powerful so that it may provide network management. you may assign directory and filelevel permissions to the data. Although Server and Workstation can both operate as either stand-alone or network systems. The services provided by the server are more powerful and it is easier for programmers to develop software that takes advantage of Microsoft’s server/workstation technology. The newest of these server operating systems. This type is performed by each workstation or server publicly sharing a directory on the network. and is limited to the publicly shared files mentioned earlier. The NT file system (NTFS) must be utilized in order to take full advantage of Windows security features. offer even more advantages and stronger security than their predecessors. With this method. Microsoft released the Windows NT operating system and a network operating system version. The NT Kernel.

Remember.. A printer need only be shared to the network to be accessible to anyone on the network. permissions. more than one printer can be installed to any machine. Workstation Service is the redirector service. Alerter Service sends the notifications that are monitored by the messenger service. Windows Network Services There are many services available in Windows to manage network flow: Messenger Service monitors the network and provides pop-up messages for the user. This trend continued with the latest Windows server operating systems (Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003. At least one domain controller is assigned to each domain. especially with the latest Windows Server 2003 family. (Of course a user still has to be assigned the permission to access a resource. The following is a list of services included with Windows Server software to ensure NetWare compatibility: NWLink is actually a clone of Novell’s IPX/SPX protocol and is used for communication between Microsoft and NetWare. computers. Even if you are installing a local printer. See Chapter 10 for more information on network security. A domain controller is a server that maintains and manages all accounts. Rights must be assigned to users in order for them to use any resources or perform any tasks in the domain. Server Service provides access to network resources. .) Installing a network printer is just like installing a local printer. Browser Service provides a list of all available domain and workgroup servers. Microsoft wanted to make NT as compatible with NetWare as possible. except that you are asked if it is to be a network or local printer.. Printing is as easy as selecting the printer that you want to use (assuming that you have the appropriate permissions). you are given the option to share it to the network. Inc. and user rights. Interoperability As Novell NetWare was the “big kid on the block” when NT came on the scene. and resources with a shared security database.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Windows Server Security Security was a major concern in the development of Windows Servers. A domain is simply a group of users. Microsoft uses domains to control access and authenticate users and computers. Windows Print Servers Any workstation or server may perform as a print server in a Windows network. 46 Specialized Solutions.

47 .well serve. FPNW (File and Print Service for NetWare) is a utility that enables NetWare clients to access Microsoft file and print services.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) GSNW (Gateway Services for NetWare) provides the gateway between an Microsoft domain and the NetWare server. It provides all of the advantages of Windows 2000 Server. when using Windows Server 2003 you typically must remove or configure security boundaries in order to get the server to.0) than the previous version in Windows 2000 (IIS 5. Network performance will decrease as the number of computers accessing the gateway increases. which govern what users can see and do on the network.0). Installing CSNW automatically installs the NWLink protocol as well. Group policies can be utilized with server 2000. and is. It also offers an improved version of NTFS and fault tolerant versions of RAID on dynamic drives.. UNIX Operating Systems UNIX stands for UNiplexed Information and Computing System. Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 is the latest in the line of Microsoft server operating systems. In contrast. In addition. This software is not included with Netware but can be purchased separately. In fact. It can be installed on the Microsoft client to allow it to connect the Netware server directly. it has more “locked down” security templates that make it less likely that users will try to go around the security. Active Directory is a directory service that stores information about objects on a network and makes this information available to both users and administrators. but it adds many features that are designed exclusively for security. Installing GSNW automatically installs the NWLink protocol as well. Migration Tool for NetWare is a tool used to convert from NetWare to Windows. Probably the biggest feature in Windows 2000 server is the addition of Active Directory. Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 server is the server-side OS to Windows 2000 Professional. Even though UNIX was not designed as a network operating system it can be. Windows Server 2003 is the first Windows server that was built primarily with security in mind. Its purpose is to move (called migrating) NetWare account information to Microsoft’s domain controller. Inc. This is necessary because all Microsoft client workstations in a domain must connect to a NetWare server through a single contact point. It allows for a single logon to access resources anywhere on the network. Windows Server 2003 offers a more secure Web Server (IIS 6. UNIX is a Specialized Solutions. Previous Microsoft server operating systems were built to serve and then had security features to protect them.. used as such. It allows Novell NDS computers to be managed just as Microsoft domain controllers. CSNW (Client Services for NetWare) is the Microsoft service that allows workstations to use file and print services on a NetWare server. DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is another add-on utility that is used to integrate user and group account information between the two operating systems.

or Macintosh System 7 for its operating system. Banyan VINES (Virtual Integrated Network Service) Like Windows. OS/2. Because of its open source nature. These terminals are not stand-alone computers. TCP/IP. as well as others. it was an extremely popular network operating system. but has lost market share since the arrival of NetWare. Inc. as well as file and printer sharing. in fact the software is available for a free download. security. to convert the UNIX host into a file server. many variations of Linux have been created over the years such as Caldera and Red Hat. It uses a GUI (graphical user interface). and messaging services. StreetTalk provides directory. but rely solely on the UNIX host for resources. UNIX is a multi-tasking. The multi-tasking UNIX host will run this software as just another application. At one time. VINES is a great performer in multi-operating system environments. A UNIX system consists of a host (a central computer) with terminals for the users. Software is available. Linux was designed to be less expensive than UNIX. It is a publicly open system that has made it popular among enthusiasts already familiar with a UNIX interface. Linux is another operating system similar to UNIX. Like Novell NetWare. . At its inception. A file redirector is used to allow the workstation to store and retrieve UNIX files as if they were in the original format. It is available on both Intel (PC) and PowerPC (Mac) platforms. and many other features associated with an OS. which means that it can be changed by a software programmer. It is primarily used on minicomputers and has many features that are favored in the engineering and scientific environments. 48 Specialized Solutions. UNIX. VINES was originally based on UNIX and has a directory services application called StreetTalk layered on top. Linux is open source. general-purpose operating system. The UNIX-based workstation can run DOS. Banyan VINES is a client/server-based network operating system. however.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide bulky operating system. multi-user.

Inc. The Mac OS X is the most current operating system used in conjunction with the Apple computer (at the time of the writing of this book). 49 . Specialized Solutions. they developed what later became known as the mouse and the first GUI display. and the processor used in Apples today is called PowerPC.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) The Macintosh ("Mac") was developed by Apple Computer in 1984. In conjunction with Xerox. both at home and on the go. Macs are known for being used primarily in video or graphic production. but users also use them personally.

Network operating systems allow a computer to function in a network environment. Without an operating system a computer is just another pile of metal and plastic. Banyan VINES.). In a server-based network. the computers may function as either a server (when sharing resources to others on the network) or a client (when sharing the resources of another computer on the network). Server and client machines typically use different operating systems. etc. Inc. The main advantages of the server-based network are increased security. With the redirector. The redirector then routes the request to the proper bus accordingly. 50 Specialized Solutions. Study through the chapter again if you need to. (UNIX. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. In a peer-to-peer network. an application is unaware that it is working from a network. Novell’s NetWare allows for client machines to use a variety of operating systems. the client computers rely on the server for their resources. . the most popular network operating systems also function as the network operating system. and at least be familiar with others. such as Novell NetWare and Windows server operating systems. There still are numerous LANs that use a network operating system over a conventional operating system. The function of the redirector is to determine whether a requested resource is located locally (on the client computer) or exists on the server (remotely).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary Operating systems are the lifeblood of the computer. and data backups. It is important for the networking professional to know the major network operating systems used today. Windows NT has Server software for the server and Workstation software for client machines. A key component in a network operating system is the Redirector (called the Requester in Novell NetWare). Today. centralization of administration.

Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS)

KEYWORDS Exercise
Keyword Client Software CSNW DSMN FAT File Server GSNW Interoperability MHS Linux Macintosh Multitasking NDS Non-Preemptive Multitasking NOS NTFS NWLink Preemptive Multitasking Print Server Redirector/Requester Security Server Software UNIX Definition

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

51

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

Review Questions
1. What is the difference between an operating system and a network operating system?

2.

What is the difference between preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking?

3.

What is the purpose of the redirector?

4.

NetWare is designed as an operating system that will overlay _____________ environments.

5.

What is NDS?

6.

What are the minimum hardware requirements for installing Novell NetWare version 5?

7.

Define interoperability.

8.

Unlike NetWare, Windows NT combines the _____________ and the ___________________ into one.

9.

What is NTFS?

10.

What is a domain?

11.

What are the minimum hardware requirements for Windows NT Server?

52

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) 12. Name some of the services and protocols that Microsoft included with Windows NT to ensure interoperability with NetWare.

13.

What OS is similar to UNIX and is a publicly open system?

14.

What type of computer was developed by Apple computer in 1984?

15.

What type of network would utilize Windows for Workgroups as an operating system?

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

53

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

54

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards

Chapter 3- The OSI Model and Communication Standards
In this chapter you will learn about the OSI (Open System Interconnection) model, what it is and its primary function. You will learn about which layer of the OSI model handles each function, and which devices function at each layer. We will also discuss the IEEE 802 standards as well as touch on various protocols and how they relate to the OSI Model. The OSI model and IEEE 802 Standards are a big part of the Network+ exam.

The Seven Layers of Network Communication
The Open Systems Interface (OSI) model is the most commonly referenced standard in the networking industry today. The International Standards Organization (ISO) released a set of specifications for connecting devices on a network in 1978. These specifications were updated in 1984 to what we know today as the OSI model. The purpose of these specifications is to describe how network hardware and software communicate with one another. These specifications allow hardware and software manufacturers to develop products that are compatible with each other. The OSI model is designed as a framework that allows communication between similar and dissimilar computer systems across a network. The OSI Model was created after many of the protocols it represents were already in use. As a result, some of the information regarding these protocols may appear to be inconsistent with the OSI Model. There are seven steps required to prepare data for transmission between the sending application and the receiving application. The OSI model represents these seven steps as seven layers. These layers are used extensively in network environments and it is imperative that the networking professional understand the different layers and their functions. The OSI model defines the rules involving how network devices will contact each other, and how they will communicate if they are using different languages. The OSI model also defines how a device knows when to transmit; when not to transmit; and how to make sure that transmissions are received correctly by the recipient. Even how the physical media is arranged and connected; how the data will flow (at what speed); and how bits are represented on the medium are defined within these specifications.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

55

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

The Seven Layers of OSI The first thing you should notice is we’ve listed the layers from the top down. This model is usually represented in this way because we refer to the layers as upper and lower layers, depending upon their functions.

Seven Layers of the OSI Model
The following is a summary of the seven layers of the OSI model starting with the top layer: Application Layer This layer of the OSI Model defines how network services or applications interact with the network. These services include file, print, and messaging services. Error recovery may also be a function of the Application layer. The Application layer is responsible for communication between a user’s application and the network. This is not the actual application or program, simply a support layer that allows an application to use the network by acting as a translator. This is the layer that allows users to send E-mail, transfer files across the network, or access a

56

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

and ending connections. and then the Presentation layer of the receiving computer translates the data back into a format that is compatible with the computer. Only the data after the last transmission will have to be retransmitted after a failure. (so that an IBM compatible computer may communicate with a Macintosh. It provides a logical connection between the two devices. The Session layer uses a name lookup service such as NetBIOS to identify and establish sessions between two computers. The Session layer organizes data synchronization and also inserts checkpoints in the data. managing. The redirector is responsible for making network services appear to be local services to a computer. Sessions may be established using simplex. Presentation Layer The Presentation layer is the translator for the network. The network redirector operates at this layer. half-duplex. they will be combined.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards network database. As its name implies. This layer is also responsible for data compression. The Transport layer is responsible for delivering data that is in sequence. 57 . Session Layer The Session layer organizes the flow of data between devices. and prepare it for its journey. and error free. It translates data into a format that is compatible with the network.) character set conversion. This layer enables computer applications to communicate with applications on remote machines as if they were local. interpreting graphics commands. The Session layer controls the communication between the two computers and determines who can transmit. The presentation layer acts as a translator between an application’s native format and the network. if the packets are too small. Transport Layer The Transport layer is responsible for the errorfree delivery of the transmitted data. Each connection is called a session. In short. The Transport layer is also responsible for packaging. without duplication. bit ordering. This layer is responsible for establishing. add any addressing information and error correction information. It is also responsible for security and other functions that allow two applications to communicate over the network. It is responsible for resizing them before being sent to the destination computer. The Transport layer accepts packets from the Session layer and repackages them. it will break the data into packets. protocol conversion. or receive. and data encryption. it presents data to the application layer. and when. etc. and un-packaging the data for transport. These checkpoints ensure that all data is sent (or received) and make it possible to limit retransmissions in the event of a network failure during transmission. or full-duplex communication. Inc. If Specialized Solutions. For example.

It translates logical network addresses into physical machine addresses and determines the best route to the destination computer. Its header includes the hardware address of the sending and destination NIC cards. It receives a packet from the Network layer and packages it into what is called a frame. Data Link Layer The Data Link layer is the second lowest layer in the OSI model. delivery of packets is not guaranteed. This layer makes routing decisions for transmissions that are further away than a single link. When you are using a connectionless protocol. In an ideal world. (These addresses are hardwired onto the NIC by the manufacturers. When you are using a connection-oriented protocol. the Transport layer is responsible for the guaranteed delivery of packets. if they are larger than the largest acceptable frame size on a network. For example. but connection-oriented protocols are more reliable. The network layer handles all the routing information as packets travel from one network to another. however. especially on large intranetworks where there may be more than one way to reach a destination. TCP is a connection-oriented protocol. IP and IPX are Network layer protocols. segmentation information and routing information.) It also includes control information such as frame type. checked for errors. This layer is also responsible for breaking packets into smaller chunks. TCP and UDP are Transport layer protocols. the Transport layer will sort out the problems and request that missing packets be retransmitted. Should an error occur. The Network layer is responsible for communication between computers via their IP addresses. This controls network congestion. When the data is received. This is accomplished through various error control and other protocol-dependent features. Routers and NICs function on this layer. Once the data is reassembled. all data packets will be sent and retrieved in an orderly. it will retransmit after a specified amount of time. the largest frame size on an Ethernet is 1. 58 Specialized Solutions. If the sending computer does not receive an acknowledgement. The Transport layer of the destination computer reassembles the data (returns it to its original state) and checks for errors and duplications. UDP is a connectionless protocol. Connectionless protocols are faster. Inc. error free manner. Network Layer The hardware that is used to construct the network plays an important role at this layer. and then assembled and sent up to the Session layer. they will be broken into smaller packets. This layer also reassembles the data before passing it up to the Transport layer on the receiving side. The sending computer does not send any more data until it receives the acknowledgement for the previous transmission. it will be un-packed.518 bytes and the smallest is 64 bytes. . stripped of its addressing information. the destination computer will send an acknowledgement that the data was received.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide they are too large.

The LLC sub-layer provides SAPs (Service Access Points) that are used by other computers to transfer information to the upper OSI layers. They accomplished this by splitting the Data Link layer into two sub-layers. and Demand Priority. It is the Data Link layer that determines whether the message is for an individual computer or not. The IEEE Committee thought that the Data Link layer needed to be further defined. Inc.2 standard defines how this takes place. It uniquely identifies devices on the same medium. The frame is accepted by the Physical layer of all of the computers on the network and passed up to the Data Link layer. Token Passing. the Data Link layer is responsible for error-free transmissions. Media Access Control (MAC) The Media Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer controls the way that multiple computers share the same media channel. then it discards the data. The MAC address is another name for the 12-digit (6 byte or 48 bits) hexadecimal address that is hardwired on the NIC by the manufacturer. it assumes the data was not damaged in transmission and sends an acknowledgement to the sending computer. It identifies a line protocol. When the sending computer does not receive and acknowledgement. it will automatically resend the packet. TCP/IP is somewhat “self healing”. The following is an example of a MAC address: Specialized Solutions. such as SDLC. it accepts the data and passes it up to the next layer. MAC addresses are copied to RAM when a NIC is initialized. The three main types of access methods are Contention (CSMA/CD & CSMA/CA).Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards In addition. The Logical Link Control layer is concerned with managing traffic over the physical medium. It is responsible for connecting two computers on a network and maintaining that link. The CRC is simply a calculation that assigns a value to the frame. it is not unheard of for these addresses to be duplicated even with these precautions having been taken. NetBIOS or NetWare and may also assign sequence numbers to frames and track acknowledgements. The first 3 bytes (6-digits) identify the manufacturer. This sub-layer communicates directly with NICs using the MAC address. If it is not. Logical Link Control (LLC) The Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer is the upper of the two sub-layers. If the Data Link layer in the destination computer comes up with the same value when it receives the frame. In this way. The combination of these numbers assures that each NIC that is manufactured (by any vendor) will have a unique MAC address. The IEEE 802. It adds a trailer to the frame that includes the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). Although quite rare. the destination computer will not send an acknowledgement. (they are the vendor code that is assigned to a manufacturer by the IEEE Committee) and the last 6-digits identify the NIC (host). The manufacturer is assigned blocks of numbers to assign to NIC cards. In a broadcast network such as Ethernet. The way that a network shares the channel is called its carrier access method. 59 . If the calculation does not check out. If it is. the data is sent out on the wire to all computers.

iso.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 00-00-13-35-FD-AB The first 3 bytes (00-00-13) identify the manufacturer of the card. The Physical layer of the receiving computer converts the bits back into frames. The Physical layer is not concerned with the contents of the packets.ch/. Point-topoint communication is the process of one device communicating with one other device . It identifies the NIC. visit www. which are intelligent hubs that use MAC addresses to send packets. Bridges are devices that connect network segments and filter data using MAC addresses. Physical Layer The Physical layer is the bottom layer of the OSI model. It is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. It converts the data into the raw bits and signals (1’s and 0’s) that are actually transmitted over the network medium. The last 3 bytes (35FD-AB) are the Device ID that is unique to the associated Vendor ID. hubs and transceivers. synchronizes the data. . Inc. 60 Specialized Solutions. It specifies such things as how many pins a network connector will have. Note: For more information on the OSI Model. Bridges operate at the Data Link layer. and what each one will do. data work at the Data Link layer of the OSI model. For example. Repeaters. It is the only layer of the OSI model that communicates directly with its peer on another computer. Point-to-point and multipoint connections are addressed at the Physical layer. The physical characteristics of a network will affect the specifications of the Physical layer. and determines when and how data may be transmitted. Switches. Point to point communication is often used between switches and routers on a network. an Ethernet network using UTP would have different specifications than an Ethernet network using Fiber Optic cable. all operate at the Physical layer of the OSI model. Multipoint communication is the process of one device communicating with multiple devices on a network. it is only concerned with the physical elements of the network and the transmission and reception of signals.

Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Specialized Solutions. 61 . Inc.

The request is then passed to the Presentation layer where a header is added to the message. over the network medium. Communication Between Peer Layers Most network models utilize this layered architecture. The Physical layer does not add a header. . This process continues until the packet reaches the Physical layer. (Remember. which also adds a header and passes the packet down to the Transport layer. and provides services to the layer directly above it. Each protocol will communicate with its peer or equivalent on the other computer. When it arrives at the Application layer of the destination computer. the process of moving through the layers is reversed. In this way even completely dissimilar systems running different operating systems will be able to communicate. Inc. Headers contain instructions for tasks that need to be performed at that level. each layer reads and performs the tasks specified in its peer’s header before passing the packet up to the next layer. in effect there is a logical or virtual connection made directly between the two associated layers. protocols can be layered so that specific protocols handle their appropriate subtasks at specific layers of the OSI model.) The request is in the form of a packet. When the destination computer receives the data. simply a support layer to allow applications to perform network functions. each layer is also responsible for adding or removing headers so that the data is ready to be interpreted by the next layer. For example: You send a request for services to the server. the Application layer is not the actual application. The Presentation layer passes the modified packet down to the Session layer. 62 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Protocol Stacks When more than one protocol is necessary to accomplish a task. Even though the data is passed down through the sending computer’s layers. These subtasks are stacked in such a way that together they complete a whole task. This is called a protocol stack. the data is back in its original form so that it may be interpreted by you and the request is considered processed. it simply converts the packet into a bit stream and sends it out onto the network medium. In order for computers to communicate with each other they need to be using the same protocol stacks. In addition to reading the headers and performing the instructions. Each protocol receives services from the layer directly below it. and up through the receiving computer’s layers. TCP/IP is a common example of a protocol stack. This is accomplished by each layer (with the exception of the top and bottom layers) adding a header to the message (or removing it on the receiving end) before passing it down (or up) to the next layer. You are communicating directly with the Application layer. or suite. The affect of this layering is that communication is seemingly only taking place between the associated layers of the two computers. As the packet travels up through the layers.

Inc. they are sometimes referred to by different names at different layers. The term packet is appropriate to all of the layers. but the following table lists the other names that might be associated with them at the various layers: Physical Layer Data Link Layer Network Layer Transport Layer Session Layer Presentation Layer Application Layer Signals or Bits or Data Stream into Frames Frames into Packets Frames or Datagrams into Segments Segments into data Data Data Data into Data Files or Messages Specialized Solutions. Because of this.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Note: Packets (also called service data units) are made up of data and headers acquired from upper layers. 63 .

it would not match. then to the Physical layer on the receiving computer and back up to the Application layer. The various layers of the protocol are communicating as though they have virtual connections.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide OSI and the Real World When working with the OSI model. we can better understand how they communicate across the layers. Data will travel from one computer to another on a network from the Application layer to the Physical layer on the sending computer. . Flow of Data As part of the Network+ Certification program. you must keep in mind that it was created after many popular protocols had already been developed. you will need to know the seven layers of the OSI model. This means that if you were to attempt to map a protocol or a standard directly to the OSI model. In fact. By relating various protocols to the OSI model. Its purpose is to provide a graphical image of how network protocols work together to provide communication between two computers. some of the components or layers may actually do the work of several layers of the OSI Model. This communication will take place as long as both computers are using the same protocols. the OSI Model is not a protocol. The following mnemonics are commonly used to help remember the layers: 64 Specialized Solutions. Inc. as in the case of the TCP/IP protocol. Also.

because each product would have to be specialized towards each type of computer or operating system. The OSI model simply defines which functions need to be completed at each layer and which protocols are to be used at each layer. These specifications make it possible for hardware and software manufacturers to create products that will function in different computing environments. 65 . etc.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Mnemonic Away Pizza Sausage Throw Not Do Please OSI Layer Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link Physical All People Seem To Need Data Processing Mnemonic No matter how you memorize the layers. Inc. This is so that different types of computers with different types of hardware and software can communicate. Keep in mind that it isn’t actually the layer that performs the task. The specifications describe how components are supposed to function. Without them we would not have as many software or hardware packages available to us. Specialized Solutions. it is the appropriate hardware or software that does the work. you do need to remember the different layers and the tasks for which each layer is responsible.

bridges. A repeater amplifies these signals so that they can travel further or across LANs. Programmers usually deal with the upper layers and decide what protocols. routers. These are the layers that have the most to do with hardware devices and other components that you can change. They rely on MAC addressing to forward messages to their destination. Bridges A bridge operates at the Data Link layer of the OSI model. as well as where in the OSI model they operate. Inc. . Repeaters A repeater operates at the Physical layer of the OSI model. As electrical signals travel across a network medium the signal weakens as a result of resistance from the cabling itself. Most routers today support multiple protocols such as: TCP/IP SNA SLIP X. Data Link layer and the Network layer. Bridges connect two separate networks to form one logical network.25 IPX/SPX SNAP PPP PPTP XNS Protocols DECnet The following is a list of NON-ROUTABLE protocols: • • • NetBEUI DLC LAT 66 Specialized Solutions. This weakening is known as attenuation. etc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Devices and the OSI Model As a networking professional. you will usually be working in the first three layers of the OSI model: The Physical layer. are going to be used when they write a program. and gateways are the most common devices that are used to expand a network. The networking professional needs to be familiar with these devices. Routers are responsible for using logical addresses to move packets from one network to another and deliver them to a host. Routers Routers operate at the Network layer of the OSI model. It regenerates or amplifies a signal across LANs. Repeaters.

but usually in the Application layer).Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Each router has its own table that defines all routes connected to it. if a packet is received from a computer using a nonroutable protocol such as NetBEUI. It is a device that combines the functions of the bridge and router. However. Inc. which can be used to connect an IBM mainframe computer to a Microsoft network. The gateway translates between the two networks so that they may communicate. If a routable packet is received the brouter will route it using a routing table (make intelligent decisions of how best to route the data). A popular example is an SNA Gateway. the brouter will bridge the packet based on its MAC addressing. Router tables can be entered manually by a network administrator or they can be dynamically updated using routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF. Brouters A brouter operates at both the Data Link and Network layers of the OSI model. Specialized Solutions. A gateway connects two computer networks that use different protocols or even different technologies. A computer with special software serves as a gateway and allows for communication between completely dissimilar networks. 67 . Gateways Gateways operate in the upper layers of the OSI model (from the Transport to Application layers.

8 802.standards. 68 Specialized Solutions.6 802. visit IEEE’s web-site at http://www.1 802. Inc.12 Defines Internetworking Logical Link Control (LLC) Carrier Sense with Multiple Access and Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Token Bus LAN Token Ring LAN Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) Broadband Technical Advisory Group Fiber Optic Technical Advisory Group Integrated Voice/Data Networks Network Security Wireless Networks Demand Priority Access LAN.9 802. but the two sets of standards were designed to be compatible. February 1980).org There are also many other web sites that discuss these standards.ieee.10 802.3 802. These standards were prepared before the OSI standards. a little surfing might be in order.4 802.11 802.5 802. and if you would like more information on them.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE 802 Standards In 1980 the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers. The following table lists the 802 standards by category: (The ones you need to know are the ones in bold!) Number 802. This project is known as the 802 project (named for the year and month the project started. (IEEE) formed a committee to create standards for LANs.7 802. 100BaseVG AnyLAN If you would like more information on these standards. .2 802. Inc.

69 . Inc.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Specialized Solutions.

ODI (Open Data Link Interface) ODI was co-developed by Novell and Apple and serves the same purpose as NDIS. which will allow a NIC to support multiple protocols.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Drivers and the OSI Model Just like every other device in a computer. Two sets of standards have been developed to define the interfaces between the NIC and the driver. The NIC driver operates at the Media Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer of the OSI model. Inc. Protocols and OSI Protocols are the rules that govern communication between computers. and it defines the interface between the Data Link layer NIC driver and the network transport protocol. It defines a way to bind more than one protocol to a single driver. and hence. Network 70 Specialized Solutions. but is designed for use with Novell NetWare and Macintosh environments. This vendor-neutral interface provides a boundary between a protocol and the driver. which allows any NDIS-compatible protocol stack to function with any NDIS-compatible driver. the NIC also needs a device driver to function. The driver allows communication between the operating system and the NIC. the network. This way more than one protocol stack can be bound to a single NIC. . The protocols used to communicate in a network environment are called protocol suites or stacks. This is because of the way they work within the OSI layers (on top of one another). The purpose of these standards is to allow operating system vendors (such as Microsoft and Novell) to write multiple drivers for the same NIC. NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification) NDIS was co-developed by Microsoft and 3Com Corp. NDIS and ODI are incompatible with one another. However.

if TCP/IP is bound first. Connection-Oriented vs. it would be like calling your friend and simply leaving a message on his answering machine. Network protocols work at various layers of the OSI model. This form of communication protocol guarantees the delivery of data. it is not uncommon for more than one LAN to be connected using a router. 71 . You have no confirmation (unless he calls you back) that he received the message. a protocol must be bound to the NIC. it will then attempt to communicate with the second protocol. Transport layer protocols reside in the middle layers of the OSI model and are responsible for establishing sessions and ensuring that data is sent and received error free. In a connectionless scenario. Protocols that are unable to send messages across routers are called Non-Routable. Routable vs. The network layer protocols also are responsible for error checking (CRC) functions. If that fails. Specialized Solutions. but connection-oriented is more reliable. Network protocols reside in the lower layers of the OSI model and handle the addressing and routing functions of network communication. There is no guarantee that the message was delivered.) The order in which these protocols are bound to the NIC determines which one the network operating system will attempt to use first. In today’s LANs however. LANs were usually just one network that served a single company or department. In connection-oriented communication. Protocol Binding In order to function. This binding process is what links the protocol stacks to the NIC driver. Application layer protocols provide support for application-to-application functions in the upper layers of the OSI Model. Protocols that are able to route messages across these devices are called Routable. It is the protocol operating at a certain OSI layer that defines that layer’s function. It is possible to bind two protocols to one NIC (such as TCP/IP and IPX/SPX) or to have two NICs with one protocol bound to each one. They also handle error checking and acknowledgments of transmitted data. You speak directly to your friend who either agrees or disagrees to come. the sending and receiving computers actually establish a connection to communicate. the operating system will attempt to communicate using TCP/IP first. Connection-oriented would be like dialing up your friend to ask them to come to a party. and in full. the data is simply sent and assumed to be received. The receiving computer acknowledges that it received the data that was sent. (This is useful if your network communicates with another entirely dissimilar network. In a connectionless communication. Connectionless Communication between computers may be connection-oriented or connectionless.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards protocols are responsible for addressing and routing communication over a network. Inc. Connectionless communication is faster. For example. Non-Routable Protocols In the early days of networking.

72 Specialized Solutions.25 XNS Protocols The following is a list of NON-ROUTABLE protocols: • • • DLC LAT NetBEUI Non-routable protocols cannot be used in routed environments (such as the Internet).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following is a list (in alphabetical order) of some routable protocols: • • • • • • • • • • • • AppleTalk DECnet IPX/ SPX PPP PPTP SLIP SMB SNA TCP/IP UDP X. It is important that the networking professional know the difference between routable and non-routable protocols and which protocols are routable. As a networking professional. you should be familiar with these protocol stacks and you should know the OSI layer in which their components function. Inc. Networking Protocols and Stacks The following are common routable networking protocol stacks. .

this protocol takes into consideration link speed and network traffic to make more efficient routing decisions than RIP. MLID (Multiple Link Interface Driver) – Resides in the Data Link layer in the MAC sub-layer. It resides in the Network layer. AppleTalk Filing Protocol (AFP) – Manages file sharing at the Application layer AppleTalk Transaction Protocol (ATP) – Provides connection between two computers at the Transport layer. 73 • • • • • • . It uses the MAC address and is non-routable. This is the NIC driver in the IPX/SPX suite. NLSP (NetWare Link Services Protocol) – This Network layer protocol is also a routing protocol. In addition to hop count. It is a routable protocol. It resides in the Network layer. Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP) – Provides transmission of packets across a network. Inc.) SPX (Sequenced Packet Exchange) – Is a Transport layer protocol and is a connection-oriented protocol. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) – This is a simple routing protocol that counts the hops needed to reach a destination. At the Presentation Specialized Solutions. and handles file and print services. It has been modified over the years and now contains the following components: • IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) – Works on the Network layer of the OSI model and provides connectionless service. It chooses the route with the fewest hops. At the Application layer it handles application interfaces. It is a routable protocol that can also use TCP/IP and OSI protocols. NCP (NetWare Control Protocol) – This control protocol resides at four different layers of the OSI model. regardless of speed.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards AppleTalk This proprietary protocol stack allows Macintosh systems to operate in a network environment. DECnet This is Digital Equipment Corporation’s protocol stack. (If data must cross a router SPX is used. This stack consists of: • • • • AppleShare – Provides Application layer services for Macintosh. LSL (Link Support Layer) – Also resides at the Data Link layer and provides the interface between the MLID and the upper layers. IPX/ SPX This protocol is the proprietary protocol that was developed by Novell for Netware servers and clients.

It also contains several others that the networking professional needs to be familiar with. Missing packets and out-of-sequence data is not checked and no acknowledgements are sent.1 and later installs TCP/IP by default. FTP (File Transfer Protocol) This protocol is used for file sharing between computers on a TCP/IP network. SNA (Systems Network Architecture) This protocol suite is used with IBM mainframes and AS/400 systems. At the Session layer it establishes and controls sessions. TCP and IP. 74 Specialized Solutions. FTP is an Application layer protocol and is available for nearly every operating system. The two main protocols in this stack are APPC (Advanced Peer-to-Peer Communications) and APPN (Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking). A datagram is a kind of packet that has minimum overhead. SMB (Server Message Block) This Microsoft protocol operates at the Presentation layer and is used for communication between the server and the redirector. TCP functions at the Transport layer of the OSI model and is a connection-oriented protocol. It is used to upload and download files on the Internet and between two computers. while APPN provides Network and Transport layer connections. APPC supports Transport and Session layer services. IP (Internet Protocol) IP is a connectionless protocol. No error checking exists and delivery is not guaranteed. so the application must do the error checking and retransmission if necessary. Novell Netware 5. Inc. It operates at the Network layer of the OSI model and is responsible for addressing packets and routing them over the network. . • SAP (Service Access Protocol) – This Application layer protocol is used on servers to broadcast (at specified intervals) the location and services that are available from that server. At the Transport layer it handles sequencing. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) UDP provides the datagram service in TCP/IP. flow control. It is faster than TCP because it is connectionless. We will cover TCP/IP extensively in Chapters 8 & 9.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide layer it handles data translation. • Many companies use Netware with the TCP/IP protocol stack. It is also layered on IP like TCP. and connection-oriented error control services. It is routable and provides support for NetBIOS names. NWLink – This Transport layer protocol is Microsoft’s version of IPX/SPX. TCP is responsible for adding header information that contains error checking and flow control information. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) The TCP/IP suite contains two major protocols.

The local computer acts as a display only and all processing occurs remotely. it also takes into consideration the network speed and traffic and makes routing decisions based on the best route. but in reverse. It operates like a combination of Telnet and FTP and allows users to access files and drives on remote computers as if they were local resources. OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Like RIP. instead of only the number of hops. this is also a Network layer protocol. It chooses the route with the fewest hops. ARP keeps a table of corresponding IP and MAC addresses that have been resolved in the previous 10 minutes. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) SMTP is an Application layer protocol that is responsible for sending E-mail from the sender’s server to the recipient’s E-mail server. NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used in a networked environment to synchronize computer clock times. It uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) to synchronize computer clock times to a millisecond. OSPF counts the number of hops to the destination computer. Telnet This Application layer protocol allows a user to log on and run applications remotely. making it connectionless. If you do not need to use passwords. It is less capable than FTP because it uses UDP rather than TCP. 75 . then TFTP would be advisable over FTP. It is designed to be reliable and allows for scalability. NFS (Network File System) Sun Microsystems developed NFS as a file and drive sharing system. It resides in the Network layer. ARP will first check its table and if a matching address is not found. ARP will add the information to its table for future use. but in addition. without regard to speed. Telnet can also be used for remote configuration of servers and network devices such as routers and switches. RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) is a related protocol that performs the same function. Inc. ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) ARP is responsible for resolving IP addresses to MAC addresses. Specialized Solutions.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used for transferring files quickly and more simply than the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). RIP (Routing Information Protocol) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) – This is a simple routing protocol that counts the hops that will be needed to reach a destination. It is an Application layer protocol. The computer that has the corresponding IP address will respond to the broadcast by sending its MAC address. it will broadcast on the local subnet to determine the MAC address of the computer with the associated IP address.

which is the main reason that it is non-routable. Instead. LAT (Local Area Transport) LAT does not have a Network layer. It is typically used between a DECserver and a VAX minicomputer. 76 Specialized Solutions. This also means that they may not be used to connect to the Internet. It is a DEC protocol used for interactive. The first specification refers to the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). This is really a type of network that is owned by telephone companies who charge organizations for use. asynchronous terminal traffic over a LAN. the X. X. Data is routed via the best connection at a given time. making X. DLC (Data Link Control) DLC operates at the Data Link layer of the OSI model. At each stop. but in between. This means that they may not be used with networks that use routers to connect multiple LANs. This means that routes change as conditions change. Packets from the same transmission are routed via the best route (and don’t necessarily follow the same route) and are reassembled at the receiving end. This is not an actual protocol and is not used to perform networking functions. This is an older packet switching network that uses switches and circuits. Data goes in and comes out. it is installed only on the print server and communicates directly with the printer.25 is a packet switching protocol that is sometimes referred to as a public data network (PDN) because it is sometimes used by more than one organization.25 network. XNS (Xerox Network System) XNS is a proprietary protocol developed by Xerox for their Ethernet LANs. It uses standard telephone lines and switches.25 functions take place at the Physical and Network layers and normally interface with a protocol called LAPB (Link Access Procedures-Balanced). This protocol is not used for data communication. . This is the host on an X.25 is also an equipment specification.25 network is sometimes referred to as a cloud. which can be unreliable due to the quality of phone lines. Inc. The second part of the specification is the DCE (Data Communications Equipment). Because of this.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide X. The DTE acts as an endpoint for communications and the DCE acts as an entry point for the DTEs. X.25 X. It is bulky and slow and has largely been replaced by TCP/IP.25 a very slow but very reliable protocol. Non-Routable Protocols The following protocols are non-routable. It was originally used to connect IBM mainframes to HP network printers. only printing functions. it is out of the administrator’s control. In addition. packets are re-examined to determine whether they are damaged.

It may be used with bridges. which is an advantage if using older MS-DOS-based systems. Inc. easy to configure and small. 77 . but is primarily used today for backward compatibility with existing networks. Specialized Solutions. It is fast.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) This non-routable protocol works at the Transport layer of the OSI model.

NetBEUI. Inc. NWLink and NetBEUI. it detects congested areas and links that are down. SLIP is not used as much as PPP. This database is typically dynamic in today’s modern networks. Like a traffic report on your radio. ISO/OSI Standard This is a complete standard with each layer having a protocol (or protocols) mapped directly to it. and notifies upper layers to route around them. and connection release.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Other Protocols The following are other protocols with which you should be familiar: SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) SLIP supports TCP/IP connections made over serial lines. It maintains a database and provides hostname to IP address resolution. It operates at the Network layer of the OSI model and performs connection services and flow control services. It does not support IPX. NetBEUI. PPP supports IPX. SNMP is used extensively with intelligent hubs. It provides machineindependent data translations that may include encryption and data descriptions. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) This is an extension to the PPP protocol. file transfers. . DNS (Domain Name System) DNS translates names that humans understand into names that the computer understands. ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ICMP is used in error-handling and control procedures. SLIP requires static IP addressing and doesn’t support data encryption. RPC (Remote Procedure Call) RPC operates at the Session layer of the OSI model. administration. Users can establish secure encrypted access to their corporate networks via Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that PPTP establishes. It provides full networking functions at every layer of the OSI model. and other protocols as well as TCP/IP. It also supports data encryption. DHCP. It handles session establishment. enabling it to use the Internet as a backbone for NWLink and NetBEUI. but it can also be modified manually by the network administrator. XDR (External Data Representation) XDR handles translation and operates at the Presentation layer. RPC is used by the redirector to 78 Specialized Solutions. This management protocol interfaces with network analyzer software making it easier to manage complex networks. or DHCP. PPTP encapsulates TCP/IP. PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) This protocol was developed to replace the SLIP protocol and alleviate some of its limitations. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Devices using TCP/IP use SNMP for controlling network communications. The main improvement is that it allows clients to connect remotely over the Internet.

Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards determine if a resource is local or on the network. 79 . Inc. It makes the remote resources appear local to the computer. Specialized Solutions. Note: TCP/IP is such an important protocol that we will be covering it in depth later in the text.

80 Specialized Solutions. The OSI model is an invaluable tool to the networking professional. . Inc. but also help you to narrow down problems when troubleshooting a network. we learned about the OSI model and its importance in networking. It is important to note that memorizing the OSI model will not only help you pass the test. you know that networking is taking place and that you have functionality up to layer three.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary In this chapter. We also learned what type of devices function at various levels of the OSI model and how these devices interact with each other. if you can get to the server through a router. For example.

x Standards Application Layer Bridge Brouter Data Link Layer Gateway LLC (Logical Link Control) MAC (Media Access Control) Network Layer Non-Routable Protocol OSI Physical Layer Presentation Layer Protocol Stack Repeater Routable Protocol Router Session Layer Transport Layer Definition Specialized Solutions. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Keyword 802.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. 81 . Inc.

What is a MAC address? 13. . A router operates at the _________layer of the OSI model. 10. managing. Which OSI layer is responsible for establishing. What is the function of the Presentation Layer? 11. 5. 4. 7. 3. 6. The ____________ layer is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. and ending connections? 12. A bridge operates at the ________ layer of the OSI model. A network adapter card operates at the _____ layer of the OSI Model. Inc. Data compression takes place at the __________ layer of the OSI. Which OSI layer is responsible for the MAC address? 8. Who developed the OSI model? 2.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions – Chapter 3 1. Which part of this MAC address is the Device ID? 00-01-A5-D3-B4-01 82 Specialized Solutions. Name the seven layers of the OSI model. What is the function of the Application Layer? 9.

What are they? 17. Name as many routable protocols as you can remember. Describe protocol binding. 83 . You have expanded your NetBEUI network into two segments and are using an intelligent router to optimize network traffic. 23. connection-oriented communication or connectionless communication? 22. The Data Link layer has been split into two sub-layers. What is the function of a Gateway? 18. Inc. Which OSI layer is responsible for delivering data in sequence. Which OSI layer makes routing decisions? 15. 21. Which is faster. Will this work? Why or Why not? Specialized Solutions.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards 14. What are NDIS and ODI? 20. Which IEEE standard defines the Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer? 19. without duplication and error free? 16.

.

and other hardware and peripherals. Xerox). It uses a BNC (British Naval Connector) “T” connector to connect directly to the NIC. it is less susceptible to EMI than UTP. 85 . which we will address here. There are numerous kinds of cable. but fortunately for the networking professional there are only three major types that you need to understand. Coaxial cable is used in Ethernet Networks. There are several cabling options.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Chapter 4 . Thicknet Thicknet is about ½-inch thick and fairly rigid. It also has a transmission speed of 10 Mbps. Network Cabling Although wireless networks do exist. video. It is not often used in today’s networks. It uses a device called a transceiver to connect the Thicknet cable to the NIC via a drop cable. The effect of hardware on network performance will be key to your networking operation. It can transmit voice. and the hardware aspect of network operations. network adapter cards. which is more commonly known as a DB-15 connector. Its copper core is thicker than Thinnet and can carry signals farther (maximum segment length is 500 meters or about 1650 feet). Understanding how different network topologies interact with different types of cable is essential. 10Base2 (Thinnet) and 10Base5 (Thicknet) in a Bus topology. or DIX (Digital. most networks utilize some type of cable to carry transmissions on the network. Specialized Solutions. along with connectors. Thinnet Thinnet is about ¼-inch thick and is flexible and easy to install.Hardware Media and Peripherals This chapter explores network media. Inc. (and we’ll cover them later in this chapter). and how wireless networks function are among the topics we will cover in this chapter. How to properly configure and use network adapter cards. a braided metallic shield called the ground as well as an outer cover. but may still be used in some temporary installations such as a construction trailer (although wireless would be a much more likely alternative). Intel. and data over longer distances that UTP or STP. Because it is shielded. The drop cable is connected to the NIC’s AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) port connector. Coaxial Cable Coaxial cable consists of a copper core (either solid or stranded) surrounded by plastic foam insulation. It has a maximum segment length of 185 meters (about 606 feet) and a transmission speed of 10 Mbps.

It is expressed in ohms. Uses 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base2 Thinnet Cable TV ARCnet Type RG-8 RG-11 RG-58 RG-59 RG-62 Impedance – Ohms 50 50 50 75 93 Coaxial Connectors British Naval Connectors (BNC) are used in both Thinnet and Thicknet networks to connect the cable to the computers. In order for the network to operate at peak performance. . Impedance is a unit of measurement for resistance to AC voltages. Inc. Thicknet was used as a backbone to connect several Thinnet networks. as well as how they are attached to the cables. In today’s networks. it has been replaced by twisted-pair cable and fiber optic cable. 86 Specialized Solutions. Using the wrong cable will cause poor performance and/or failure of the network. As a networking professional you will need to be familiar with the different types and their uses. They are specified based on their impedance. all electronic components must operate at the same impedance. In the past. Summary of Coaxial Cables Not all coaxial cables are the same. It is attached directly to the NIC but allows network signal to flow straight through it as well as to the NIC. it is not as easy to install. BNC Cable Connectors BNC T Connector The BNC T connector is used to connect the network interface card to the cable.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Because it is thicker than Thinnet.

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals BNC Barrel Connector The BNC barrel connector is used to connect two lengths of Thinnet cable together. The BNC terminator is a connector that has a resistor built in that performs this function. Inc. It is common to connect a Thinnet LAN to a Thicknet backbone using a transceiver. This cable is called a drop cable or a transceiver cable. N Connector Transceivers The computers in a Thicknet network do not connect directly to the cable as with Thinnet. A transceiver is a device that transmits and receives signals on a network medium. The transceiver has a port for an AUI connector (AUI port connectors are also called DIX connectors or DB-15 connectors). It is soldered or crimped onto the cable to make the connection. Thicknet uses a device called a transceiver. BNC Connectors N Connectors Thicknet uses N connectors that screw on. and an AUI cable. BNC Terminator Both ends of the cable must be terminated to absorb signals and eliminate signal bounce. 87 . One of the terminators must be grounded. and is used to connect the device to the network. Both ends of the cable need to be terminated with one end grounded. Specialized Solutions.

this was time-consuming and it absorbed signal so it was not the common approach. It is flexible and easy to install and is the least expensive of all the cable types. most networking professionals used a clamp-on transceiver. . Inc. This cable type consists of insulated pair strands of copper wire that are twisted around one another. Vampire Tap Twisted-Pair Cable Twisted-pair cable has become the most popular type of cable used in networks today. Instead. This types of connections have been largely replaced by newer cable methods such as twisted-pair and fiber optic cable. The twist helps 88 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Transceiver Vampire Taps Although transceivers can be connected by cutting a cable and splicing N connectors and T connectors on the transceiver. These clamp-on transceivers were often referred to as vampire taps because they utilized sharp teeth that punctured the cable to make the connection. There are four pair strands in most twisted-pair cables.

It has a maximum segment length of 100 meters. The quality of UTP is based on the number of twists per meter in each pair of wires. the faster the signal can be sent through the wires without crosstalk. Category 5 UTP has a transmission speed of up to 100 Mbps. The following is a summary of UTP cables. there are six categories. The tighter the twist. Inc. The telephone wire we have all seen in our homes is an example of twisted-pair cabling. it is more sensitive to EMI. UTP wire typically consists of eight wires or four pairs. This results in less sensitivity to EMI. Category 3 cabling has a transmission speed of 10 Mbps. There are two types of twisted-pair cables: Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) and Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP). Currently. UTP Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) cabling is the less expensive of the twisted-pair cable types and hence the most popular. Twisted Pair Cabling Specialized Solutions. Since it is unshielded. 89 .Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals prevent crosstalk and sensitivity to EMI. Category 1 2 3 4 5 5e 6 Maximum Data Rate Less than 1 Mbps 4 Mbps 16 Mbps 20 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps 1000 Mbps Uses Doorbell Wiring Token Ring and Voice 10BaseT and Token Ring Token Ring ATM and Gigabit Ethernet ATM and Gigabit Ethernet Extremely fast broadband STP Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling is insulated with a foil mesh between the wire pairs.

The RJ-45 jack’s position can therefore be changed from patch panel to patch panel to use a different set of cables for the same connection. Wall plates are typically used to make the connection to the computers themselves. The front of the patch panel contains RJ-45 ports (a port is a female counterpart for the RJ-45 jack). Distribution Panels Distribution racks and shelves are sometimes used to create more room for cables when floor space is at a premium. Expandable patch panels (sometimes called punch down blocks) are also used with UTP installations. The pin location is a color-coded slot into which the wire is punched down using a special tool punch down tool to make the proper connection by stripping the insulation from the wire without breaking the wire. An RJ-11 jack has four connection points where an RJ-45 jack has eight.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Twisted-Pair Connectors UTP and STP are usually connected with RJ-45 connectors. Wall Plates for RJ-45 90 Specialized Solutions. They come in various sizes up to 96 ports and support transmission speeds of up to 10 Gbps . An RJ-45 connector looks just like a common telephone jack (RJ-11) only larger. The wire is assembled in the back of the patch panel in what is called the pin location. This is an excellent way to organize network cables. Inc. This gives the network administrator a greater degree of flexibility and provides fault tolerance for the network cabling system. RJ-45 Connector AppleTalk AppleTalk networks utilizing STP cabling uses a DIN-type (DB-9) connector. . These patch panels act like a switchboard where cables are connected and organized.

fiber-optic is used in networks that need a secure media that transmits at high speeds over long distances. This cladding reflects the signal back into the fiber. it is therefore not as common as UTP. it consists of two separate strands enclosed in a plastic jacket for strength.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Fiber-Optic Cable Fiber-optic cable is the ideal cabling for networking. IBM Cabling IBM has its own special cabling for use on their Token Ring networks. Because of this feature. The following is a summary of IBM Types: Specialized Solutions. One strand transmits and one receives. as it is the most expensive and most difficult to install of all the cabling types. They do not conform to the same specification as used with standard UTP. (The core can also be made up of plastic. 91 . the data cannot be tapped or stolen. Signals are sent along the cable as pulses of light.) Because data only passes in one direction over fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic cable consists of a glass core surrounded by a coating of cladding (layer of glass or plastic). which is easier to install. which reduces signal loss. It supports extremely high bandwidths and is not subject to EMI. IBM cabling is based on its Type. SC Connector (for Fiber Optic Cable) ST Connector (for Fiber Optic Cable) Because data is transmitted as light and not as electrical impulses. but plastic core fiber-optic cannot carry the signals as far as glass. .. However. Inc. It also supports much longer segment lengths (several miles).

Cannot be used for 16 Mbps Token Ring. Lower cost alternative to type 1 or 2. IBM has developed its own cabling complete with its own standards and specifications. . Four UTP with two twists per inch – 22 or 24 AWG wire – maximum cable length is 45 meters (148 feet). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fiber Optic Data patch cables. IBM Connector 92 Specialized Solutions. Same as type 1 but adds voice capability along with data. These are very rarely used in today’s modern networks. An IBM connector is sometimes called a hermaphrodite. Two STP – 26 AWG Wire Not Defined Two STP – 26 AWG Wire Two STP –26 AWG Wire Uses Connect between terminals and distribution boxes or between different wiring closets.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Type 1 Wire Specs Two STP solid core 22 AWG wires – maximum length 101 meters (331 feet). Not Defined Two 62.5/125-micron multimode fibers. Plenum grade. Six twisted pairs. two STP and four UTP – maximum length 100 meters (328 feet). Inc. Contains a shield for use under carpets. The connector that they developed is unique in that any connector can connect to another as opposed to having “male” and “female” connectors as with other types of connectors.

Specialized Solutions.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Summary of Cabling The following table summarizes the specifications for network media: Media Bandwidth (Mbps) Nodes/ Segment 1 Varies 100 30 1 NA Maximum Nodes per Network 1024 260 300 90 1024 Varies Maximum Cable Length (meters) 100 100 500 185 2000 32 UTP STP Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Fiber Optic Infrared 4-100 16-155 10 10 2000 1-10 Note: We will discuss Infrared later in this chapter. 93 . Inc.

Bandwidth Bandwidth is a term used to measure the ability of a network medium to transmit data. but cannot send a message. The signal flow is bidirectional. If this type of cable were used in the plenum. Both you and the party you are talking to can talk and listen at the same time.Baseband vs. the telephone utilizes full-duplex transmissions. (send and receive) but only one at a time. Broadband There are two techniques that are used to transmit signals over cable: • Baseband uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel. Inc. these fumes would circulate throughout a building in the event of a fire. Coaxial cable comes in two grades: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Plenum. As the AWG wire number decreases. 94 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Cabling Terms The following are terms that you will encounter when working with network cabling: AWG (American Wire Gauge) AWG is the standard that describes wire thickness. the wire thickness increases. . It is used with analog and utilizes TDM (Frequency Division Multiplexing). fire codes are very specific about what types of cabling can be run in this space. Typical STP and UTP wires are 24-gauge. • Simplex vs. An example would be a CB radio transmission where only one person can talk at a time. a pager can receive a message. Duplex • • Simplex refers to one-way communication only. Because this space does circulate air through a building. Bandwidth is measured in megabits per seconds (Mbps) or gigabits per second (Gbps). For example. It is used with digital and utilizes TDM (Time Division Multiplexing). For example. The signal flow is uni-directional. Full-Duplex allows for two-way simultaneous transmissions. For example. 10-gauge wire is heavier than 14-gauge wire. PVC grade cable is less expensive than Plenum grade cable but it gives off poisonous smoke and gas when burned. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable or medium. Half-Duplex can send transmissions both ways. This space is used to circulate air through a building. • Plenum Grade Cabling A plenum is the space between the ceiling and the floor above. PVC is used for the outer cover and the insulation in Polyvinyl Chloride grade cabling.

It is therefore specifically designed to be used in these circulation areas. how will the cable need to be installed? (If there are tight corners. A networking professional must be aware of local fire codes regarding plenum cabling. Plenum Grade Cables Selecting Cables As a networking professional you will need to determine which kind of cabling medium to use for a given network. such as: • • • • • Budget Network Traffic Security Needs Size/Distance Environment The installation parameters need to be considered as well. the flexibility of the medium should be considered.) Will plenum grade cable need to be purchased? (If installing cabling in the plenum. local fire codes will need to be addressed.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals In contrast. Plenum grade cable is insulated and jacketed in special materials that give off a minimum amount of smoke and fumes. There are many factors that you must consider if you are to meet your networking objectives.) Specialized Solutions. 95 . Inc. shielded cable or fiber optic cable might be more appropriate.) Will the cable be installed in “noisy” areas where EMI will be a factor? (If installing the cable near equipment or fluorescent lighting. For example.

Is future growth of the network expected? (Expandability for future growth is easier to achieve if it is planned for in advance.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide How long will the cable runs need to be? (If the network will be small.) If security is an issue on the network and the data to be transmitted needs to be secure. Inc. fiber-optic cabling might be appropriate to avoid any tapping.) Transmission speeds and. there is no need to use heavy duty cabling when another type would be more cost-effective. last but not least. . cost are issues that will need to be addressed when planning your network. On the other hand. Building a low-cost network that doesn’t do the job won’t win you any brownie points in the long run! 96 Specialized Solutions. attenuation could have an affect on network performance if you use cabling on a large network where long cable runs are a factor.

data is moved along in groups. Digital: Signals that are simple 1’s (on). you need to have a basic understanding of signals and clocking. Clocking Clocking is the method used by the NIC to count and pace the number of signals that it sends and receives. 97 . The NIC takes data coming from the computer in parallel form and converts it into serial data so that it can be sent along the network cable. Specialized Solutions. or 0’s (off). Inc. Data traveling via a computer’s bus is traveling in parallel because the bits are traveling along side-by-side. This is how the NIC keeps track of how much data has been sent or received. Network cabling moves data in a single data stream. Signals There are two types of signals: Analog: Signals or waveforms that frequently take the form of sine waves. Because these paths are side-by-side.) This card is installed into an expansion slot on every computer on the network and the cable is connected to the card’s port. most buses are 16-bit or 32-bit. Signals and Clocking In order to understand how a NIC works. The purpose of this card is to translate the data that the computer can understand into signals that can be transmitted over the network medium. This is known as parallel communication. NICs are used to connect the computer to the network. It makes the physical connection to the network. Preparing the Data Computers carry data internally via data pathways called buses. and controls the flow of data on the network. Older computers had 8-bit buses which meant that data could be sent 8-bits at a time. Today. We’ll discuss the different data bus architectures a little later. This is known as serial communication. are also known as Network Adapter Cards. Signals are sent in a continuous flow that represents the start and stop of a data frame.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Network Interface Cards (NICs) Network Interface Cards or NICs. Analog data has an infinite number of possible states. handles network addressing. which constantly vary in one or more values. (And of course to translate it back again.

The speed of the transmission. When this occurs. Most computers utilize Direct Memory Access (DMA) and the computer assigns some of its memory space for use by the NIC. How much data each card can hold before overflow occurs. Configurable Options In order for the computer to communicate with the NIC. The NIC signals the computer to send the data that it wants to transmit and the computer’s bus moves the data from memory to the NIC. The amount of time between confirmations. the two cards start sending and receiving data. DMA allows the NIC to access the computer directly without having to go through the CPU. Controlling the Data Flow Before transmitting. Each NIC has a unique address that is hardwired onto it by the manufacturer. If one card is faster or more sophisticated than another card. Before transmission actually takes place the NICs agree on the following points: • • • • • • The maximum size of the groups of data to be sent. they agree on common parameters so that the data is sent at a speed that can be handled by the slowest card. Data often moves faster than a NIC can process it. The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) committee assigns blocks of these unique numbers to each manufacturer. This informs the other computers on the network of its location. the NIC may need to be configured. Inc. This communication takes place so that both the sending and receiving cards can agree on data flow and confirmation parameters. the data is sent to the card’s RAM (buffer) until it can be processed. DMA (Direct Memory Channel) The NIC must be able to communicate with the computer in order to prepare data for transmission on a network medium. The time intervals between data chunks. Plug-and-Play cards configure themselves to be compatible with the 98 Specialized Solutions. a NIC will send data over the network to the receiving card. The amount of data that will be sent before a confirmation. This makes transferring data much faster.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Addressing/MAC Address The NIC is also responsible for encoding the signals it sends out on the network medium with its unique MAC address. Once all of these parameters are agreed upon. .

See Appendix A for common address assignments. and some are set using software. DMA channels are used by devices that frequently need access to large amounts of memory. Some of these settings are configured by using DIP switches or jumper settings. The main concept to understand is that the NIC is set up to use an IRQ that is not already assigned to another device. These IRQ lines are part of the system hardware and each device needs its own line. See Appendix A for common IRQ assignments. while others do not use RAM addresses at all. The operating system and the NIC need to have compatible resource settings. Typically IRQ5 is used for the network adapter card. These hexadecimal port numbers define a channel between a device and the processor. Each device must have a unique base I/O port number. In practice. The main difference is that there are only eight DMA channels available. This buffer area is used to store incoming and outgoing data frames. such as: IRQ (Interrupt Request) The Interrupt Request (IRQ) line is used by the NIC (and other devices) to contact the CPU. Some NICs have settings that allow you to specify the size of the buffer. Having an IRQ conflict (more than one device sharing an IRQ) can cause problems. Inc. Check your system’s documentation for assignment and availability of base I/O port addresses. Check your system’s documentation to determine its current IRQ settings. these devices can access the memory that they need without interrupting the processor. Only devices like NIC cards that need this type of memory access are assigned DMA channels. This is sometimes referred to as the RAM start address. DMA Channel Configuration of Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels is similar to IRQs. The device is constantly listening to this channel for commands from the processor. not all devices need one. in this case the NIC. The good news is that unlike an IRQ. 99 . Base Memory Address The base memory address marks the location in a computer’s RAM of the beginning of the buffer area that is reserved for use by a device. Specialized Solutions. The most important thing to remember about IRQs is that typically no two devices can use the same interrupt. IRQ3 and IRQ15 may also be used if IRQ5 is already assigned. Base I/O Port Address This is the channel through which data flows between a computer’s hardware (like a NIC) and the CPU. With a DMA channel.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals operating system so that they may utilize the system’s resources. certain IRQs are almost always used for specific devices. Other cards will need to be configured manually.

The two speeds available are 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps. 100 Specialized Solutions. Wireless LANs are discussed later in this chapter. They usually use a type of antenna (omnidirectional) and an antenna cable. Connector Type Your NIC may automatically adjust to use the kind of connector that you are using (BNC. If the correct ring speed is not set a computer will not be able to connect to the network and may even cause the network to fail. Inc. Fiber-Optic NICs Due to the high-cost of fiber-optic adapter cards.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Ring Speed In Token-Ring networks the ring speed must be set on the NIC. Wireless NICs Wireless NICs are used to connect wireless network systems to the computer. RJ-45. Special software is usually needed to connect a wireless NIC. or both). they are usually only used in special cases where high-speed direct computer to fiber-optic cable connections are required. or you may have to configure it manually. .

The Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) is a 32-bit bus. With this card comes the same expandability enjoyed by desktop PCs. They are generally 32-bit buses. but can be a 64-bit bus. They are also called PC-Card Buses. including network connectivity. 101 . Inc. Micro Channel (MCA) is a 32 bit bus. Today most buses are either EISA or PCI. The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) is a 32-bit bus. Laptops PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers. Micro Channel is a data bus developed by IBM that requires licensing to be used by manufacturers and isn’t used much. Standard Bus Types There are six data bus architectures found in Intel-based computers: The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) is an 16-bit bus. Specialized Solutions.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Data Bus Architecture A data bus is a group of parallel conductors (circuit traces) found on the motherboard that is used by the CPU to send and receive data from all the devices in the computer.

Shared Adapter Memory is a method by which a NIC contains RAM that it shares with the computer as if it were actually installed in the computer. Without this feature. the NIC would be a bottleneck. 102 Specialized Solutions. Both EISA and MCA NICs offer Bus Mastering. This type of card is expensive. . This is a method by which the NIC takes temporary control over a computer’s bus. The data would then move directly to system memory leaving the CPU free to process other tasks.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Performance Because of the effect that the NIC can have on network performance. thereby improving network performance. Inc. but investing in one can increase network performance by 20 to 70 percent. Shared System Memory is a method by which the NIC utilizes a portion of the computer’s memory to process data. Network traffic travels faster than most NICs can process data. Some NICs have onboard microprocessors that eliminate the need of the computer’s CPU to process data. RAM Buffering holds data in RAM chips that are located on the NIC until it can be processed. it is important that it is configured correctly and optimally. Most cards offer features that are designed to improve network performance: Utilizing Direct Memory Access (DMA) improves network performance by allowing the computer to move data directly to the NIC’s buffer without going through the CPU. thereby bypassing the CPU.

but through the use of an infrared or radio medium. a company needs to connect two networks located in two nearby buildings. This is misleading as most wireless networks utilize a system that consists of both cabling and wireless components. Wireless networks use wireless access points (WAPs) to “connect” the network devices to each other. – hubs). Mobile Computing . Extended Local Area Networks . They are also useful to create a backup system for an existing network. With wireless systems. 103 . Doctors make rounds all over the hospital and are often not at their desks when they need to access their computers. For example. Wireless is also an option for areas where installing cabling would be impossible or unsightly. making them ideal for uses that require frequent moving.e. People who are constantly on the move are able to access their networks whether they are at home. Inc. or open reception areas where the cables would be visible. • Why Wireless? Wireless networks are useful if you need to provide a temporary network where running cabling would not be cost effective. the office.Wireless networks are frequently used to connect two LANs. Sometimes wireless systems are used to connect to remote locations such as ocean dwelling oil platforms. Mobility is another reason wireless networks are created. This would include historical buildings where local codes would not allow renovations. With some applications it is crucial that the network never goes down. A wireless system can help ensure that the network will still function even in the event of cable breaks. Outdoor installations often utilize wireless systems. but usually the wireless components are members of a wire-based LAN. Specialized Solutions. or on the road.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Wireless Networks The term wireless network implies that it is a network that doesn’t use any cabling.Cellular and satellite technologies are increasing the popularity of wireless networking. a user can access the network from anywhere in the building. They function just like other access points (i. Wireless networks can be classified into three basic categories: • • Local Area Networks (LANs) – There are fully wireless systems. Wireless networks are more portable than cabled systems.

Infrared transmits very fast because of its high bandwidths. Inc. This involves using infrared (below Red) light to carry signals to a receiver. These signals need to be rather strong because they can be affected by light sources. they are also fairly immune to eavesdropping. Infrared Networks There are four types of infrared networks: • • • • 104 Reflective Infrared Line-of-Sight Infrared Scatter Infrared Broadband Optical Telepoint Specialized Solutions. Infrared networks typically broadcast at about 10 Mbps. . The effective distance between a transmitter and a receiver is limited to about 100 feet. Infrared is not sensitive to radio-frequency interference.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless Antennae Wireless Transmission Methods There are four basic methods of wireless transmissions: • • • • Laser Radio Microwave Infrared You use infrared transmissions every time you use your TV’s remote control. such as windows. and because the transmissions are tightly focused.

which are then transmitted over separate frequencies. The signals can be broadcast via two methods: hopping. it is less susceptible to eavesdropping. which then routes the signal appropriately. Spread-Spectrum Radio Transmissions Because spread-spectrum broadcasts over a range of frequencies. until it reaches the receiver. etc. however. Specialized Solutions. Broadband Optical Telepoint Broadband Optical Telepoint. In the direct sequence modulation method.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Reflective Infrared With reflective infrared. Narrow-Band Radio Transmission This is sometimes called single-frequency radio and is similar to broadcasting from a radio station. In the hopping method. The signal can be blocked by heavy concrete or metal walls. the available frequencies are divided into hops and the transmitters and receivers “hop” from frequency to frequency for a predetermined length of time. the signal is beamed towards a central unit. there must be a direct line-of-sight path between the transmitter and receiver. Line-of-Sight Infrared With this type of infrared system. It does. The effective distance of the signal is limited to about 100 feet. This type of transmission is commonly used to connect multiple LAN segments together. The transmitter and receiver are tuned into the same frequency and thus it does not require line-of-sight transmission. require an FCC license and is subject to eavesdropping. Transmission speeds with this high-end type are competitive with cable-based systems. Inc. 105 . as the name implies. the message is broken into parts (called chips). Radio Transmission Radio transmission wireless is popular with a high bandwidth at 10 Mbps. uses broadband technology. ceilings. but unblocked it can enable mobile computing over a limited range. or direct sequence modulation. Scatter Infrared Transmission rates are slower with this type as the signal is designed to bounce off of walls.

Signals are beamed up to the satellite and then sent back down to the appropriate receiver. This form of microwave communication is used to transmit globally. There are three forms of mobile computing: • • • Packet-Radio Networking Cellular Networking Satellite Station Networking Packet-Radio Networking Packets are sent via a satellite. Satellite Microwave This is a very expensive technology and is utilized by very large corporations who pool the billions of dollars required to develop and launch a satellite. 106 Specialized Solutions. The packets sent are called Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) and this form provides very fast communication. Terrestrial Microwave This is used for earth-based communication such as between two buildings. These network-style packets are encoded with source and destination address information. or across large flat open areas like bodies of water or deserts. . Cellular Networking Cellular networking is achieved via the cellular phone network. mobile computing is a growing technology that provides a nearly limitless range for traveling users of this type of network. Inc. It is used for line-of-sight communication. and only the destination device can receive and read the packet. Satellite Station Networking Microwave is currently the most common of the long distance transmission methods in the US. This form of microwave communication is used to transmit over shorter distances.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Microwave Due to microwave transmission capabilities.

107 .Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Specialized Solutions. Inc.

AUI. After discussing at network cabling we then took a look at the hardware that acts as the intermediary between the cabling and the computer itself. You should know the types of connectors used for each cable type: BNC. Fiber-Optic cable uses pulses of light to carry signals. transmits. it is important to understand the concepts associated with wireless networks. . and Fiber-Optic. etc. Wireless networking is the trend of the future. As a network professional. Twisted Pair. The four basic wireless types are: Infrared. Inc. it is important for you to be able to configure the network card for optimum performance. It prepares. you should know the maximum segment lengths for each cable type. receives.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary The first part of this chapter covers the various aspects of network media or cables. and Microwave. Twisted Pair can be Unshielded (UTP) or Shielded (STP). Radio. Coaxial comes in two types: Thinnet and Thicknet. RJ-45. Laser. There are three primary types of cabling: Coaxial. we took a look at the future. This device is called the network interface card (NIC) and provides the physical connection to the network. and controls data flow over the network. 108 Specialized Solutions. As a networking professional. In addition. Finally.

Inc. 109 . Keyword Analog Signals AWG Bandwidth Base I/O Port Address Base Memory Address Baseband BNC Connector Broadband Buffer Cellular Networking Clocking Coaxial Cable Digital Signals DMA (Direct Memory Channel) EISA Bus Fiber-Optic Cable Full-Duplex Half-Duplex IRQ ISA Bus Laser Transmissions Definition Specialized Solutions. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword MCA Bus Microwave Transmissions Narrow-Band Radio Network Adapter Card Network Interface Card PCI Bus PCMCIA Card Plenum Reflective Infrared Ring Speed RJ-11 Connector RJ-45 Connector Satellite Microwave Scatter Infrared Shielded Twisted Pair Simplex Single-Frequency Radio Spread-Spectrum Radio Terminator Terrestrial Microwave Thicknet Thinnet Transceiver Unshielded Twisted Pair 110 Specialized Solutions. Definition .

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Keyword Vampire Tap Definition Specialized Solutions. Inc. 111 .

What is the most expensive cable type? 13. What is the purpose of a transceiver? 5. . How is a vampire tap connected? 6.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 4 1. What is the maximum segment length of Thinnet? 2. Inc. What type of connector is used with twisted pair cable? 12. What is the least expensive of the cable types? 112 Specialized Solutions. What is the most popular of the cable types? 10. What type of connectors are used with Coaxial cable? 4. What is the maximum segment length of UTP? 8. What is the maximum segment length of Thicknet? 3. What is the purpose of plenum cabling? 7. What is the transmission speed of category 5 cabling? 9. Which twisted pair cabling is less sensitive to EMI? 11.

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals 14. List some advantages of fiber-optic cable.

15. What does AWG stand for and what is it?

16. Describe baseband.

17. Describe broadband.

18. What is the difference between simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex communication?

19. What is the function of a network adapter card?

20. In Token Ring networks, what are the two ring speeds available?

21. Where would you expect to find a PCMCIA card?

22. What are some of the reasons you would need to install a wireless network?

23. What are the four basic wireless transmission types?

24. Which is the most secure type of radio wireless network?

25. Which microwave transmission type is used to transmit globally?

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

113

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

114

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards
In previous chapters, we laid the groundwork for understanding networking and we looked at the different networking topologies and cabling options. This chapter explores the various protocols used in network communication. Access methods used by various network protocols will also be discussed, along with the way data is transmitted over a network in packets, or frames. Ethernet is one of the most popular networking architectures. In this chapter, we will discover how Ethernet works, as well as how Token-ring networks function. AppleTalk and ARCNet networks are also included in this chapter. After completing this chapter, you will have a working knowledge of the different network architectures and the access methods that they use. You will also understand how networks send data and what information is included in the frames that are transmitted across the network medium. You will develop an understanding of Ethernet networks and the IEEE standards for Ethernet. You will also know how Token Ring networks function and what hardware is required to make them function. AppleTalk and ARCNet architecture, while not as popular as Ethernet, are still important technologies that the networking professional needs to comprehend. A protocol is a language that computers use to communicate with other computers, in this case, over a network. In Chapter 3, you saw how each layer of the OSI Model has different protocols that define how the information travels. The way these protocols interact is called a protocol stack. The following main protocol stacks are the most important: • • • • • Internet Protocol Suite TCP/IP Novell NetWare’s Protocol Suite, IPX/SPX IBM’s Systems Network Architecture, SNA Digital’s DECnet Apple’s AppleTalk

The OSI Model was created at a later date than some of the aforementioned protocols; thus, they do not map directly to the OSI Model. Protocols function at three basic levels: • • Application protocols provide support for application-to-application interaction and data exchange. Transport protocols ensure that data is sent to the correct destination without errors. Specialized Solutions, Inc. 115

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • Network protocols route information, handle addressing, and check for errors. Network protocols also set the standard for communicating in different network environments.

A protocol must be bound to the network adapter card, also known as the network interface card (NIC), in order for it to be used with a network computer. In some instances, as in the case of TCP/IP or IPX/SPX, two protocols may be bound to one card. The order in which the operating system will use the protocol is determined by the order in which the protocols are bound to the NIC.

Access Methods
In a network, multiple computers are contending with each other for access to the network media. The rules for determining how a computer may send or receive data on the network is called the access method. The access method that a system uses is designed to prevent simultaneous sending of data along the cable. If two or more computers were to send data at the same time, the data may collide and be destroyed (or partially destroyed). The access method organizes the sending and receiving of data. All computers on the network need to utilize the same access method in order to be consistent in the way that the data is handled. This will ensure that a dominant access method being used by one computer doesn’t override access to the cable causing the network to fail. There are three primary access methods: • • CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) or CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) Token Passing

• Demand Priority CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) CSMA/CD is known as a contention method. This is because computers on the network compete with each other for the chance to transmit data on the cable. With CSMA/CD each computer on the network checks the network cable for traffic. If it “senses” (carriersense) that the cable is free, it will send data. While there is data traveling on the cable, no computer will transmit data. Occasionally, however, two computers will transmit data at the same time and the data will collide. The Collision Detection aspect of CSMA/CD causes the two computers to stop transmitting and then attempt to retransmit after a specified period of time. Naturally, the more users who are connected to a network, the denser network traffic becomes. Greater network traffic can dramatically slow down the CSMA/CD access method.

116

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) This access method is not as popular as CSMA/CD because the sending computer will transmit its intent to transmit before sending out data. Sending out messages that it is about to transmit increases network traffic and slows down network performance. It is, however, the access method that works best with wireless connections; since the wireless channel can be verified before the data is sent. Token Passing The token passing access method is used on networks that utilize the ring topology. A token (a special type of packet) is circulated around the ring from computer to computer. If a computer needs to transmit data on the network, it must wait until it possesses the token. A computer that is waiting to transmit will take control of a free token. It will add additional header and trailer information to the token as well as the data that it wishes to transmit. Data is transmitted in frames. The header information that is added to the token includes sending and receiving addressing information. The trailer includes error control information. When the computer is ready, the token is released back out onto the network and continues around the ring until it reaches the destination computer. The destination computer grabs the token and receives the data. It then adds some data to the token indicating that it received the data and releases the token back out onto the ring. The token continues around the ring until it arrives back at the source computer. The source computer takes the token and confirms that the data it transmitted was received. It then creates a new “free” token and releases it back out on the network to be used by any computer that needs to transmit. If either the source (sending) or destination (receiving) computer detect errors in the data that was transmitted, the frame would be resent. A computer in a Token Ring network must possess a token in order to transmit. Because only one computer at a time may transmit, this is not a contention method and there are no data collisions. (Some more recent versions of the Token Ring network have the capability to pass two tokens around the ring.) Demand Priority The demand priority access method is designed for the 100 Mbps Ethernet standard 100VG-AnyLAN. It has been addressed in the IEEE 802.12 standard and is based on the hubs and end-nodes being the two components that make up a 100VG-AnyLAN network. An end node in a 100VG-AnyLAN could be a computer, router, switch, or bridge. The hub manages network traffic by searching for requests to transmit from all the nodes connected to the network. The hub is responsible for verifying that all end-nodes, addresses, and links are functioning. Demand priority is more efficient than CSMA/CD because there is only traffic between the sending computer, hub, and destination computer, instead of broadcasts over the entire network. Because of the cabling method used with this access method, (four pairs Specialized Solutions, Inc. 117

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide of wires are used, which enables quartet signaling) computers can send and receive at the same time. Contention can occur with demand priority if two computers transmit at exactly the same time, but it is possible to configure so that certain types of data receive priority when there is contention. If the hub receives two transmissions simultaneously, the one with the highest priority is serviced first. If the two transmissions have the same priority level, they are serviced at the same time by alternating between the requests.

118

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Computer control data such as service requests and commands. Packet Structure Packets may contain: • • • Files. Session control codes to indicate the need of a retransmission. The sending computer breaks the data into packets and adds information to each packet in order to make it possible for the receiving computer to reassemble them in the correct order. Another reason for not transmitting data in such large chunks is error detection. and if they were sent out onto the network medium in this form they would overload the network cabling and slow the network dramatically. The data to be transmitted. Data is broken down into small chunks called frames or packets. Instructions that tell the receiving computer how to reassemble the data. only a small portion of the data is affected (and needs to be re-transmitted). This information allows for error checking after the data has been reassembled. but we will use the term packets. data needs to be processed into a form that can be transmitted across a network medium. The destination address of the receiving computer.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Network Communications (Frames and Packets) As we’ve discussed previously. Specialized Solutions.) Data is converted to packets in order for it to be moved across the network medium more quickly. if there is a transmission error. The destination computer receives the packets and reassembles them in the correct order to translate it back into the original message. Error checking information such as Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) information. Instructions for the network indicating how to transmit the data. information. or messages. 119 . Also. (The terms frames and packets are often used interchangeably. Data files tend to be quite large. All packets contain: • • • • • • The source address of the sending computer. Inc.

Most files are much larger than this so many packets will be made up to complete the transmission. the CRC asks the source computer to retransmit. Data This part of the packet contains the actual data that is to be transmitted. and clocking information. Usually. If the results are the same. A Packet 120 Specialized Solutions. If there is a discrepancy. the source and destination addresses. the computer assumes that the packets all arrived intact. the calculation is run again. Inc. packets can be various sizes. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a mathematical calculation that is calculated at the source computer and attached to the packet. The header contains information such as an alert signal to announce that a packet is being transmitted. Trailer The information in the trailer can vary depending upon the communication method or protocol used in a network. usually from 512 bytes to 4Kilobytes.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Packet Components Headers Headers are attached to each packet. Depending upon the network. the trailer contains the error checking information. When the packets are reassembled at the destination computer. .

Inc. 121 .Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Specialized Solutions.

like NetBIOS (Windows) or NetWare (Novell). Thicknet coaxial (10Base5). Ethernet (802. and typically transmits at 10 Mbps. data (in this case passengers and freight) is moved in various cars. Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802. These provide the standards for the railroads.2) The Logical Link Control layer. It is probably the most popular network architecture used today. as addressed previously. Logical Link Control (802. is one of two sublayers of the Data-Link layer and is concerned with managing traffic over the physical medium. but its primary function is maintaining the network link by identifying a line protocol. It is a baseband system and utilizes the CSMA/CD access method. but all railroads that are built to the same standards can exchange cars (data). The standards define the means of communications. we are going to look at different standards for networks. There are rules or protocols that govern how the cars are loaded and the origination and destination points. However. For example. . some are diesel. There are a number of Ethernet IEEE standards. some are wide gauge. The LLC has the ability to track acknowledgements. The following are the four that transmit at 10 Mbps: • • • • 10BaseT 10Base2 10Base5 10BaseFL 122 Specialized Solutions. The original version was a 2. Standards work in the Physical and Data Link layers of the OSI model.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Standards Network standards can best be described as the physical and functional characteristic of a network. in a railroad. It can be installed with Thinnet coaxial (10Base2). Ethernet uses a bus or star topology (10BaseT and 100BaseT use the star topology and 10Base2 and 10Base5 use a bus topology).3) Ethernet is a non-propriety network architecture that was originally developed at the Xerox Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) by Robert Metcalfe and David Boggs. it is the rails and switches that govern the actual movement of the trains (data).94 Mbps network system that would connect over 100 computers on a one-kilometer cable. In this section.3 standard and is a method for computers and data systems to connect over shared cabling. Not all railroads are the same (some are electric. Protocols that are used with the OSI model define the rules of communication. or Twisted Pair cable (10BaseT and 100BaseT). Inc. and some are narrow gauge).

indicating its maximum segment length.5 meters. The “2” stands for 2 times 100 meters. (There may be five segments but only three may be populated. The main use for this specification is for long cable runs. The minimum distance between nodes is 2. however. Inc. it transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology. The maximum segment length for 10BaseFL is 2000 meters. 10BaseFL (Fiber Optic) 10BaseFL is the specification for running Ethernet over fiber-optic cable. to name a few. and the maximum number of segments is 5 with 3 being populated. 10BaseT uses the star topology. The maximum number of nodes per network is 1024 and the minimum distance between nodes is 2. The maximum number of segments containing nodes per network is 3.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 10BaseT (Twisted Pair) The “10” in 10BaseT indicates that it transmits at 10 Mbps. is 185 meters. 10BaseT has a maximum segment length of 100 meters (Twisted Pair wiring maximum segment length) and it is connected using RJ-45 connectors. The maximum number of nodes per segment is 100 in a 10Base5 system. 123 . It transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology in a bus topology. The maximum number of nodes per segment is 30. As its name implies.5 meters. The actual maximum segment length. These applications include video. The “5” stands for 5 times 100 meters. The “Base” indicates that it uses Baseband technology (single channel). If the segment must exceed this limitation. 10Base5 (Thicknet) 10Base5 uses Thicknet (coaxial) cable. The maximum number of nodes per network 90. And the “T” indicates that it uses Twisted Pair cabling. While 10BaseT can and does work with STP cabling. The minimum distance between nodes is . The two Ethernet standards for 100 Mbps are: • 100BaseVG-AnyLAN Ethernet Specialized Solutions. 100 Mbps IEEE Ethernet Standards The IEEE committee has introduced new specifications for 100 Mbps Ethernet standards that can meet the demands of today’s high-bandwidth applications. and computer aided design. The maximum number of nodes per network 100. BNC connectors and a transceiver. It transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology. document and image storage. it is most commonly created with UTP cable. meaning 10Base5 has a maximum segment length of 500 meters. repeaters can be used for longer distances.5 meters.) This is referred to as the “5-4-3 Rule”. 10Base2 (Thinnet) 10Base2 uses Thinnet (coaxial) cable with BNC connectors in a Bus topology.

the 100 means that it transmits at 100 Mbps and the Base means it uses baseband technology. and provides a data rate of 1 billion bits per second (one gigabit). Gigabit Ethernet is carried primarily on fiber optic cable. to some degree.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • 100BaseX Ethernet (Fast Ethernet) 100VG-AnyLAN In 100VG-AnyLAN the VG stands for Voice Grade. (It can be extended longer but it requires special equipment. Because of its intense speed. although copper can be used with much shorter distances. using the CSMA/CD access method. The T4 means that it uses four-pair twisted pair cable. 124 Specialized Solutions. This uses a star topology over fiber-optic and Category 4 and 5 twisted pair cable at a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps.) 100BaseX (“Fast Ethernet”) Fast Ethernet (as 100BaseX is sometimes called) is simply an extension to the existing Ethernet 10Base Ethernet standard. 100BaseVG requires its own hub and cards. and the FX means fiber-optic cable is used. 100BaseVG. 10-Gigabit Ethernet is also on the horizon. It is known by at least four names: 100VG-AnyLAN. ATM competes. the TX means it uses two-pair twisted pair cable. VG. Inc.12 is the standard that defines this technology. and the longest cable length is 250 meters. and AnyLAN. with Gigabit Ethernet. Gigabit Ethernet is currently being used as the backbone in many larger networks. It can support the demand priority access method as well as an option for filtering address frames at the hub for added privacy. It is basically a way of transmitting Ethernet frames and Token Ring packets. Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet is a transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area networks (LANs). When you see any of these terms. The IEEE specification 802. they are referring to the same thing. There are three different specifications: 100BaseT4 (this uses UTP four-pair Category 5) 100BaseTX (this uses UTP or STP two-pair Category 5) 100BaseFX (this uses two-strand fiber-optic) As you know. . It uses Category 5 twisted pair cable or fiber-optic cable in a Star Bus topology. but that will be referred to later in this book.

It is also compatible with operating systems such as: • • • • • • • • • Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows NT Server Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Microsoft Windows 95 and Windows 98 Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Microsoft LAN Manager IBM LAN Server AppleShare Novell NetWare Ethernet networks may be segmented in order to improve performance. 125 .Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Other Ethernet Considerations Many communication protocols are compatible with Ethernet including TCP/IP. Specialized Solutions. Inc. Ethernet also works in the UNIX environment. by joining with either a router or a bridge.

The computer that wants to transmit takes possession of the token. The data frame is a different type of frame than the token. The cable used is STP and UTP (IBM types 1. more than the cable design. The Token Ring access method. Access Control This sets the frame priority and is also where it is encoded to let the network computers know whether the frame is a token or a data frame.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Token Ring (802. Inc.5) The Token Ring architecture is defined in the IEEE 802. While the token is in use by a computer to send data. The physical ring is in the hub and the logical ring represents the data’s path between the nodes. it is a star ring with each node connected to a central hub.5 standard. Data collisions are avoided because only one computer is transmitting at a time and no other computer is allowed to transmit unless it possesses the token (which won’t be released until the previous computer is finished). The sending computer encodes the data frame with information such as: Start Delimiter This marks the start of the frame. primarily in IBM mini and mainframe systems. How it Works Basically. This token will travel around the ring until a computer signals that it needs to send data. Each computer on the network acts as a repeater and regenerates the signal as the token/data frame passes through it. the network creates a token when the first computer comes online. 126 Specialized Solutions. it uses the baseband technology. It is not as popular as Ethernet. This is so that no other network computer will try to possess it to transmit data. it is known as a data frame. A computer cannot transmit data in a Token Ring environment unless it possesses the token. IBM introduced Token Ring around 1984. The name Token Ring implies that the physical layout is that of a ring. The token is actually a stream of data that allows a computer to transmit data on the cable. and it has a transmission speed of 4 or 16 Mbps. Frame Control The information here determines whether the frame is being transmitted to all computers on the network or one specific “end station” computer. but is still used today. is what sets Token Ring apart. . Like Ethernet. Actually. Destination Address This is the address of the receiving computer. 2. and 3).

called the active monitor. It then encodes the frame with information indicating that it received the data and there were no errors detected. To accomplish this task. Its address is checked to confirm that there are no duplicate addresses on the network and the other computers on the ring are notified of the new computer’s active status. This signal contains the address of its upstream neighbor. The network will then attempt to diagnose and repair the problem without disrupting the entire network. the old frame is removed and the computer creates a new token and releases it back out onto the ring. Whether it travels clockwise or counter-clockwise is a matter of convention. the active monitor performs a process known as beaconing. Assuming that the frame acknowledges that the transmission was successful. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) This is information for error detection. The beacon is passed from node to node around the ring. the sending computer releases it out onto the network where it travels around the ring until it reaches the destination address.5 standards say it travels clockwise. as well as its own address. it will notify the monitor that it didn’t receive an expected signal. has the responsibility of making sure that frames are being sent and received accurately. Beaconing In a Token Ring environment. The active monitor investigates any frames that have traveled the ring more than once and ensures that only one token is traveling the ring at any one time. Inc. The receiving computer copies the data into its buffer. As each new computer comes online. This computer. while IBM says counter-clockwise. it would indicate that the data needed to be retransmitted.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Source Address This is the address of the sending computer. After encoding the data frame. the Token Ring network initializes it so that it may join the ring. the first computer to come online is assigned to monitor network activity. Every seven seconds the active monitor will send out a beacon. if there were errors. Or. The frame is then released back out onto the cable where it travels back to the sending computer. . Message This is the data or file to be transmitted. Note: Data travels in only one direction on a Token Ring network. 127 Specialized Solutions. The IEEE 802. If a computer doesn’t receive a beacon when expected.

Media filters convert cable connectors between the adapter card and the telephone jack (RJ-45/RJ-11) and reduce line noise. just as in other networks that use a hub. Using UTP. Token Ring Patch Cables IBM Type 6 cable is used for patch cables in a Token Ring network. These patch cables extend the connection between the computer and the hub or between two hubs. Using the RJ connectors allows for one cable run to connect both data and telephone equipment. each ring can connect up to 72 computers. This hub is known by a few names. In a pure token passing environment. Instead the connectors can be flipped over to connect to one another. Type 3 cable is connected with RJ-45 (8-pin) connectors if using four-pair or RJ-11 (4-pin) if using two-pair. The minimum distance using either STP or UTP is 2. Using UTP. . The Type 128 Specialized Solutions. Token Ring Cabling STP or UTP is used to connect each node to the hub. each ring can connect up to 260 computers. Type 1 has a maximum distance from the computer to the hub of 101 meters. The faulty node is then disconnected from the ring so as not to affect the rest of the network. but types 1 and 2 may also be used.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Multistation Access Unit (The Hub) The actual ring in a Token Ring network is in the hub. There is some contention as to the maximum distance from the computer to the hub using Type 3 cable. the maximum distance from the computer to the hub is 100 meters. as there are no male and female ends. Using STP. it is only about 45 meters. Each node is connected to the hub via a cable. The maximum distance between two MAUs is 152 meters. the failure of one computer will bring down the rest of the network. Using STP. When a computer is connected. but some vendors state that it is as much as 152 meters. Token Ring Connectors Token Ring networks use MIC (Media Interface Connectors) connectors for Type 1 and Type 2 cable. This is known as a hermaphroditic connector. Inc. IBM states that it is only 46 meters.5 meters. MAUs can sense when one of the connected computers fails. such as: • • • MAU (Multistation Access Unit) MSAU (Multistation Access Unit) SMAU (Smart Multistation Access Unit) A Token Ring network can be expanded to have as many as 33 hubs. Most Token Ring networks use IBM Type 3 UTP cabling. the internal ring converts to an external ring at each connection point.

Type 6 may also be used to increase the length of Type 3 cable or for connecting computers directly to the hub. Although it is not nearly as popular as the Ethernet or Token Ring architectures. it is still an environment that you may be dealing with as a networking professional. Token ring networks are well suited to fiber-optic cable. AppleTalk is included with the Macintosh operating system software. Token Ring Adapter Cards A Token Ring has two transmission speeds: 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps. Patch panels are used to organize patch cables. Using a pair of repeaters. thereby decreasing the number of transmissions needed for data transfers. care must be taken that all cards on the network are compatible. therefore network capabilities are built into all Macintosh computers. The 16 Mbps card allows for a larger frame length. A 16 Mbps card can slow to 4 Mbps. but a 4 Mbps card cannot speed up to 16 Mbps. Token Ring Fiber-Optic Using fiber-optic cabling in a Token Ring network can increase the range up to ten times that of copper. Specialized Solutions. Token Ring Repeaters Just as in other network environments. Token ring cable lengths may be increased by using repeaters. hubs may be up to 730 meters apart with Type 1 or Type 2 cable and up to 365 meters apart using Type 3 cable. Inc. All cards on the network need to be set at the same speed. Therefore.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 6 cable has a maximum distance of 46 meters between the computer and the hub. 129 . AppleTalk AppleTalk is the network architecture used in a Macintosh environment.

or Fiber-Optic cable in a Bus topology. . EtherTalk EtherTalk is simply a way to run AppleTalk on coaxial cable using an EtherTalk NB NIC. UTP. by using zones. TokenTalk TokenTalk is simply a way to run AppleTalk in a Token Ring (IEEE 802. mainframe computers. This address is chosen at random from a range of available addresses. AppleShare The file server on an AppleTalk network is called AppleShare. AppleShare also provides a print server. The TokenTalk NB card is used to attach to a Token Ring network. it will store it to use each time it goes online. and even some UNIX computers. LocalTalk performance is rather limited. so it is not used as often as Ethernet or Token Ring.5 Standard) environment. the device assigns itself an address. Zones LocalTalk networks may be joined together using zones. AppleTalk can be used by non-Macintosh computers such as IBM compatible computers. A zone is a named Subnetwork that users may access simply by selecting it. AppleTalk can incorporate other types of networks such as Token Rings. it is very inexpensive to initiate. It uses the CSMA/CD access method and can connect a maximum of 32 devices. LocalTalk LocalTalk uses STP. When a computer goes online in a LocalTalk network. Apple has always been open to third-party development.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide AppleTalk networks are usually called LocalTalk. 130 Specialized Solutions. EtherTalk may be implemented on Thinnet or Thicknet coaxial cable. Inc. As such. Digital Equipment Corporation’s VAX™ computers. If it is not being used by another computer. It will then broadcast the chosen address to determine if any other computer online is using the address. This is useful for expanding the LocalTalk network or for relieving traffic on a larger network. Since Macintosh builds-in the hardware for LocalTalk in every computer. The client software for AppleShare is also included in the Apple operating system.

called ARCNet Plus. with coaxial cable and BNC connectors. If computer #1 is at one end of the network and Computer #2 is at the other. ARCNet transmits data in packets. These packets contain the destination address. ARCNet utilizes hubs. Obviously. The ARCNet Plus architecture can hold up to 4096 bytes of data. It is a simple and inexpensive network architecture that may use a Bus or Star Bus topology. active. or smart. Inc. a token is needed in order for a computer to transmit data. ARCNet was developed before the IEEE 802 specifications. the maximum cable distance is 244 meters. A later version. but is normally installed using RG-62 A/U coaxial cable. Specialized Solutions. the maximum cable distance between the computer and the hub is 610 meters. 131 . the source address and up to 508 bytes of data. If using either the Star or Bus topology with UTP and RJ-45 or RJ-11 connectors. the token is passed in numerical order.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards ARCNet ( Attached Resource Computer Network) In 1977 Datapoint Corporation developed the ARCNet technology.5 Mbps. ARCNet can use twisted-pair or fiber-optic cabling. this can really slow a network down if the computers are not in order. It uses a token-passing access method that transmits at 2. Instead of the token traveling around a ring. If using an active hub in a Star topology.4 standards (Token Bus LAN). has a data transmission rate of 20 Mbps. the token still passes in numerical order. but it can be adequately charted to the 802. Just like other token-passing access method architectures. These hubs may be passive. This distance drops to only 305 meters if using the Bus topology.

Wireless technology is discussed in further detail in chapter four. generally). Speeds up to 54 Mbps will be available within wireless networks (LANs to be more specific). 132 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless (802. Inc. Interference can be lessened by their ability to function in their own band (in the GHz range. The capacity to use wireless technology is there for large-scale deployments as well. .11 is the latest generation of enterprise-class wireless LAN technology.11) IEEE 802.

which includes an alert signal that a computer is transmitting. Packets will include information to identify the source address. It is important that you understand their specifications and access methods as well. which is where the error checking calculation is located. and the access method (such as CSMA/CD. 133 . and the Trailer. The 100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet architectures will be even more prevalent in the future. Inc. Token Passing and Demand Priority) is the governor of how traffic is controlled on a network. destination address and the actual data that is being transmitted. etc. It is extremely important that you understand the different cabling schemes and their connectors as well as the maximum segment lengths for all of these different architectures. it is important that you are knowledgeable about the different types of Ethernet such as 10Base2. as well as the different cabling schemes and cable distances. Most packets also include error checking or CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) methods to check the reliability of the packets received. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. Data is sent out on the network in smaller chunks of data called packets (or frames). If it were sent out in one continuous stream it would quickly bring network traffic to a halt due to the large size of the data.3 standards. the source and destination addresses. It is important for the networking professional to understand the characteristics of each access method. 10Base5. AppleTalk and ARCNet architectures may be used less than Ethernet or Token Ring. go back and review the chapter again. but as a networking professional you will encounter them.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Summary This has been another information intensive chapter and we covered a lot of information on the different networking architectures. As a networking professional you will encounter this type of network most often. Although Token Ring is not as popular as Ethernet. and 10BaseT. and clocking information. Packets consist of three components: the Header. Managing network data is all about traffic control. it is still a common architecture and is said to be increasing its market share by as much as 20% per year. Be sure that you understand how this architecture works. the Data. Therefore. Specialized Solutions. CSMA/CA. If you are having trouble with any of these concepts. The popular Ethernet architecture is defined in the IEEE 802.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Keyword Access Method AppleShare AppleTalk ARCNet Beaconing CRC CSMA/CA CSMA/CD Demand Priority Ethernet EtherTalk Frames Header Hub LocalTalk Multistation Access Unit Packets Patch Cable Smart Multistation Access Unit Token Passing Definition 134 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. . Inc.

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Keyword Token Ring TokenTalk Trailer Zones Definition Specialized Solutions. Inc. 135 .

3. 5. What is the maximum segment length in 10Base2? 11. What type of connectors are used in 10Base5? 12. Describe how data is transmitted in the Token Ring architecture. Inc. What happens if two computers using the demand priority access method transmit at exactly the same time? 6. How is data transmitted over the network cable? 7. CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA. What does the “T” in 10BaseT indicate? 10. What type of cable is used in 10BaseFL? 136 Specialized Solutions. Why isn’t token passing considered a contention method? 4. . What sort of information do packet headers contain? 9. What is CRC and what part of the packet is it usually located in? 8. Describe the difference between the two different contention methods. What are the three primary access methods? 2.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 5 1.

Describe beaconing as it applies to Token Ring architecture. Which way does data travel in a Token Ring network? 20. Name the two main 100 Mbps Ethernet Standards. 19. How does a computer on a LocalTalk network obtain its address? 23. 137 . What are the two transmission speeds of Token Ring? 17. Inc. 14. How does data flow in an ARCNet network? Specialized Solutions. How are data collisions avoided in the Token Ring architecture? 18. What is the purpose of AppleShare? 24. What is a SMAU? 21. Which IEEE Specification defines Token Ring? 16. 22. What type of access method does an ARCNet network utilize? 25. Describe a MIC connector. Which IEEE Specification defines Ethernet? 15.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 13.

.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 138 Specialized Solutions. Inc.

you need to approach the project as if it were for someone else. This is especially true if you will be maintaining or upgrading this network in the future. Then we will study in more detail network adapter cards. (demographics). This is well and good if you are designing a network for your own use. address. etc. pay attention to details. you will have a lot of knowledge and expertise with networks. Hardware compatibility is a major consideration in network design and is often the source of troubles when expanding or upgrading networks. you certainly don’t want to design a network around Windows. You could design the best high-speed low-cost Windows system that was ever imagined. your design will not work for them. in many cases. Inc. and goals. how they are installed and how to troubleshoot them. Most importantly. Even if this network is your own. The customer’s likes. However.Chapter 6 – Network Design Chapter 6 – Network Design In this chapter we are going to put to use many of the terms and concepts that we studied in earlier chapters of this training guide. The place to start a new network is with a pad of paper and a pencil or two. As a network professional. This will give you the discipline to ask yourself the right questions and to begin the process of documentation. this is a Macintosh-based company. 139 . The Customer Obtaining a clear understanding of your customer and their needs is essential when designing a network. rather than a client’s. for example. The following is some suggested information that you should gather about your customer: The basics – name. For most of us this will be a rare event since most companies already have a network and are working with expanding or increasing the performance of what they already have. The facility – how big is the building(s) and what is the layout of the various offices? Current level of technology – how many computers do they have. but if your customer is a Macintosh user. Specialized Solutions. you are not designing for yourself. dislikes. etc? If. There are two things that you will need to know. Starting a Network Project A unique opportunity for any network professional is to design a network from beginning to end. whoever is assigned the upgrade project will be forever indebted to you. who has them. We will start by looking at what it takes to layout a network from scratch. Finally. The most important aspect of creating a new network is to document everything that you do. The product – this is very important as a graphic arts client will have different needs than an engineering firm or a law office. we will consider hardware compatibility. (If not. The size of the company and the portion of the network affected. are there any printers or scanners.

There are many intermediate drawing packages that are available. The following are some questions to consider: Will this be a simple LAN or a complex WAN with Internet and remote users? What are the future needs? Is this network to start small and expand later. . Once you collect this information. at this time. you are now ready to begin the designing of the network. You may want to consider using a drawing program to create a layout of the facility. the same 1000 documents could be as little as 30 MB. etc. A good intermediate program is Visio 2002. you must get a clear definition of goals of the network. 140 Specialized Solutions. only documenting the facility and the requirements of the network. For example.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The Network Goals In addition to the customer’s needs. files services. if the file is compressed. With this information in hand. print services. This can be done using any word processor or spreadsheet program. prepare a design document. or will it meet the requirements of the latest technology? How much traffic do you anticipate now and in the future? A business office moving 1000 documents and spreadsheets across a network will generate far less traffic than a graphic arts or engineering office moving 1000 large imaging files. or as complex and as expensive as AutoCAD. Inc. a textonly MS Word file will be approximately 30 KB of data while a single page image file will average 50 KB. Your document should include a summary of all the information you collected. or as large as 8 GB. This can be a simple program like Microsoft Paint. This program provides simple templates for both facilities and network components. Is an Internet connection needed now or in the future? Will it be for all users or just a select few? What additional services will the network need to provide? Sharing of resources. Remember. So. or as much as 8 MB for the same image scanned (black and white) at 300 dpi uncompressed (even more if color or grayscale). you are not documenting your network. You will need this information as you make decisions in the next few steps.

Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions. 141 .

The level of security required. The most prominent are simplicity and cost. Are they committed to the change or are they going to resist the change? When to Choose Peer-to-Peer There are many reasons why you would want to choose peer-to-peer. not all nodes may need the same level of security. You may need to install the software. Most personal computers today will have more than enough power to successfully operate in a peer-to-peer environment.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Determine Network Type Once you collect all the information described above. all computers are equal. The type of business and how that will affect network traffic. The decision that you make at this time will have an affect on the hardware and software choices that you make in the future. Peer-to-peer networks are economical to setup and implement. you can send work to it if you need color printing (assuming that they share the printer to the network). You may have to add network cards and cabling. Here you will have two choices: peer-to-peer or client/server.” That is. They can provide services to the network and use services provided by others. Also. you will have no problem. as generally it is not installed during a standard installation. they include the necessary software and protocols for file and print sharing. This sharing is on a directory level. The following lists the information that you will need in order to choose your network type. Are they able to handle a sophisticated network or must the network be transparent to them? The available budget (both now and in the future). Skill level of the network users. If you do not have this information go back and get it. Likewise. For example. they do not require a high-power computer with lots of speed and processing power. Inc. but most operating systems like Windows 95 and up and Macintosh OS X are “network ready. The first is the type of network you will be designing. This means that every 142 Specialized Solutions. if a colleague has a color printer and you don’t. The commitment of management and users. may cause problems in the future. you can share it to the network and anyone who has access to the network can send work to it. . Keep in mind that you may not be able to mix two different operating systems without additional software or upgrading to a client/server network. Peerto-peer networks do provide some security in the form of allowing you to select what you want to share to the network. if you have a printer connected to your computer. In a peer-to-peer network. The number of nodes (computers and other resources) on the network. You will need to take careful consideration of the information collected in the first step to assist you with this decision. The disadvantages of peer-to-peer networks are security and limited network size. you will need to start making some decisions. As long as you have the original software disk (CD). This can range from none to very high. The wrong choice now. First.

a peer-to-peer network may be the perfect solution. In a small network where everybody knows each other and security is not an issue. As for size. While there are many advantages. In large networks. the more knowledgeable the administrator needs to be. In a peer-to-peer situation. server-based networks are scaleable. but there will most likely be reductions in network performance as stations are added. the network must operate transparent to them. all network resources are usually centralized. The more sophisticated the network.Chapter 6 – Network Design file in the directory will be available to the network. Using a file server to maintain all of the company-wide files. a client with a limited budget may consider this type of network as a starting point or entry-level network. administration can be a Specialized Solutions. The most prominent disadvantage is the cost to install and operate the network. Remember. This centralized file system also makes for easy transfers of files throughout the company. In a server-based network. the general rule is that peer-to-peer networks should be limited to about 10 workstations. It is obvious that server-based networks will require better and higher-powered hardware. slower processor and/or has limited memory (RAM). When to Choose Client/Server On a client/server network (also known as server-based networks). if employees need remote access. Most employees have little or no knowledge of the workings of computers. they will also be using your processor to do their printing. have high-power processor. if anyone is using a resource on your workstation. Perhaps the most significant aspect of using server-based networks is security. In small networks. but what is often overlooked is the cost to administer the network. Before you can use any resource. 24-hours per day. These server-based networks provide a central database that manages access to all the resources as well as the network itself. This means that one or more computers are designated as servers and provide the resources for the entire network. etc. This means that you can start small with one server and a few workstations. information can be made available to them through a RAS (Remote Access Server) connection. In a strict peer-topeer network. such as your printer. You can connect more workstations. must less the workings of a network. The result will be a slow-down of performance on your workstation. Since these computers are larger. This will be especially true if your workstation is using an older. all that is needed is one or two knowledgeable people to act as administrators. Another advantage of server-based networks is that the servers are never turned off. instead of backing up individual workstations. Also. this will take part of their normal workday will be taken up to react to any problems and maintain existing accounts. you will also need to consider the disadvantages. This means that if you need to use the color printer that is connected to the print server. Last but not least. For these people. and expand as your needs expand. 143 . only a network administrator can create a user name and assign permissions to that user. any user can log on to a workstation (with a new name and password) and gain access to the network. you must have both the authorization to use the network and permission to use the resource. Also. and lots of memory. the performance of the network will be better than in a peer-to-peer network. Inc. you will not need to worry if Mary is on vacation and her computer is turned off (since she is the only one in the company that has a color printer). is another advantage of a server-based network.

16. stick with it and move forward. which would limit its access to those outside of the company. in others it could go either way. If you are not sure you have enough information. For this reason. present each case to the client and let them make the final decision.168. The only problem is that if your firewall were to come down. In some cases.0 -172. Prepare a case (on paper) of the pros and cons of each. This decision will be the basis for the rest of your network design.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide full-time job for one or more people and may even require the skills of a certified network professional.32.0. When you are sitting on the fence. with open access to the global community.255. Making the Choice Making that final decision is often difficult.0.0 144 Specialized Solutions. If all else fails. Once you have made this decision. A public network would be the Internet. Actually. The use of these addresses will completely prevent the address conflict issue. you can use any address that you want to use inside of your own network and behind your firewalls.255.0.0. get more.0 -10.168. be sure to follow a disciplined procedure: Collect all your information.255.192. .0.0 192. 10. Each network operating system supplier has their own certification program such as Microsoft’s MCSE (Microsoft Certified System Engineer) and Novell’s CNE (Certified Novell Engineer). it is highly recommended that you use these addresses for your private addressing. let us define the difference between the terms public and private network.255 172. there are specific addresses that are filtered by the routers at the backbone of the Internet.255.255.255.0. the answer will be very obvious. then you might have an address conflict with another entity on the Internet.0.0.0 255. Public and Private networks In addition. since your organization will more than likely need access to the Internet and networks outside of their LAN.0 255. A private network would be a corporate network or an Intranet.255 255. For this reason. Inc.0 .

145 . Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions.

On the other hand. 146 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Define the Starting Place If you are designing a network from the ground up and literally starting with a blank piece of paper. You may also want to take an inventory as part of your initial evaluation. The following is an example of an inventory sheet. . if you are creating a new network and have no inventory to work with. don’t just simply ask someone what he or she has. This form should identify the equipment and its specifications. whether hardware or software. if all or part of a network already exists. ask him or her to show you. Inc. Use it as a starting place to build your own. The following page shows an example of what an inventory sheet might look like. The documenting of existing equipment includes two components: hardware and software. When taking this inventory. this is a detailed inventory that requires someone that is knowledgeable in computers and networks. you will need to make a detailed inventory of the materials you already have. Also. Some of the information you need may be inside the machine and you will have to remove a case or two. use this sheet to define your proposed new equipment. Feel free to use this as a starting place for developing your own customized form. Remember. you can skip this section. The best approach is to make an inventory sheet for each piece of equipment. you must add new hardware. That person is you! Be sure to take a small toolkit and a flashlight with you.

Chapter 6 – Network Design Network Equipment Inventory Sheet Item Number: ___________ Type of Equipment: Computer Printer Telecommunication Other If Other: _______________________________________ Location: Identification: Make: Model: Serial #: ____________________________ ____________________________ _____________________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Computer: Processor (Type and Speed) RAM Hard Drive(s) Monitor Video Card Modem Connected Peripherals Bus Type (ISA. Inc. 147 . PCI. etc.) # of Free Slots Network Card Printer: Installed RAM Interface (Parallel or SCSI) Network Compliant (Yes/No) Peripheral: Type of Device Interface (Parallel or SCSI) Specialized Solutions.

Name of Program:(Operating System) __________________ Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Name of Program: Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Name of Program: Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Use additional paper if necessary. describe each program. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Telecommunication: Describe the device and its function. Software: If this device uses software. 148 Specialized Solutions. Inc.

149 . Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions.

and collect all of the documentation you have been working on. Inc. It is time to get out that pencil and paper.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Design the Network At last we should have enough information to start designing our network. A Network Layout 150 Specialized Solutions. it will make future documentation easier. By assigning them a number now. make a drawing of the facility and each network node. This might be a good time to start identifying each node with a name and number. or the software drawing program that you used to create the layout of the facility. Using the inventory sheets and the objectives of the network. Start with the location of existing equipment (if any) then draw the location of the new equipment. .

Cable Type – If your goal is to save money now and you don’t need a high-speed network. 151 . a small network with only a few workstations sharing files and printing will probably work fine with CAT 5 UTP cables. but if this is a large facility. 5-4-3 – If your installation is coaxial Ethernet. (up to 2 kilometers – 6562 feet) choose fiber optics. you might consider CAT 3. such as in an imaging environment. or just good common sense. CAT 6 is the UTP of choice. the cost of CAT 5 is not significantly more than CAT 3. In most environments this will be no problem. it would be worthwhile to spend a little more now and install CAT 5e or CAT 6 than to replace it in 2 to 3 years. It may be more cost effective to purchase a large quantity of plenum grade rather than a mix of plenum and standard grade. for long term use and eventual upgrade to 100 MHz. Cable Grade – Local fire codes. The most important aspect of media selection is to be sure that the media you choose will meet the performance criteria of the network. you must comply with requirements of the 5-4-3 rule for number of segments. If economics are a major concern and you are designing a small temporary LAN. if you are not sure if expansion is in your future. In addition. However. It is the most labor-intensive of all the processes and the most costly to replace. The 100 Mbps speed of this media will handle this workload without problems. you will need to remember that all cables must originate from the hub. a simple bus topology with each computer in a series will save on the budget (don’t forget to terminate each end). On the high end. may require that you install plenum grade cables for part or all of your installation. you must make sure that the longest connection (computer to computer. The following are several other factors that must be considered before making your final choice: Topology – If you use a physical star topology. where money is no object and security is critical or you have long distances to cover. These cables are inexpensive and if all computers are in the same proximity. hub location is critical for determining cable lengths. Specialized Solutions. Inc. It will cost a lot more to upgrade later. you will need Thicknet coaxial cables. consider Thinnet coaxial cable. and the run from the server room to the maintenance shop is 400 meters (1312 feet). Realistically. repeaters and nodes. if you are going to have hundreds of computers or transfer large quantities of large files. you will need to install CAT 5e or CAT 6 UTP to be able to take advantage of its 1000 Mbps speed. or hub to computer) does not exceed 100 meters (328 feet). For example. Cable lengths must be considered. However.Chapter 6 – Network Design Media Selection Media selection is an aspect of installing a network that should not be taken lightly. Therefore. If you intend to use UTP or STP cables.

and this is also the ultimate atmosphere for a computer. are usually what is found in the office environment where most networks are installed. it may not be prudent to recommend the change to Windows 2000/2003. Environmental Concerns A major concern that is often overlooked when designing a network is the actual environment in which the computers will be operating. If the customer has always used Novell NetWare and is satisfied with the performance. Like us. they are sensitive to temperature changes. low-humidity. These routable protocols are more difficult to configure. Therefore. or uses lots of electrical or electronic equipment that generates EMI (electromagnetic interference) or RFI (Radio Frequency Interference). you may need to install fiber optics at least in that area. However. Protocol Selection The most important issue with selecting a protocol is to use the same protocol throughout the network. with a relative humidity of 30 percent. and RFI. As long as it is configured well and meets the needs of the customer. such as a surge suppressor and an uninterruptible power supply. and should have a method to ensure that clean power is available. The next choice is whether to use a routable or non-routable protocol. Constant temperatures of around 70° F. high-humidity. and fluctuating line-voltages from the incoming power source. but it is important that the room be well ventilated and climate controlled. Fiber optics are also a good alternative when the manufacturing environment cannot allow for any possibility of even a small spark. Fortunately. Environment – If all or part of the network is in a hostile environment (corrosive manufacturing) you should consider alternatives like fiber optics.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Noise – If all or part of the installation is located in an industrial environment (vibration and noise). sometimes the customer will make the choice for you. EMI. . which requires the use of routers. which is kept at the ideal temperature for the equipment. Inc. Less than ideal conditions will also decrease the life expectancy of your equipment. Most network operating systems today are robust and will operate transparent to the users. It is not strictly necessary to have a dedicated room for the equipment. On the other hand. you need a routable protocol such as TCP/IP. since they don’t use electricity to transmit a signal. which can generate damaging ESD. it will work. such as NetBEUI are simple and work well with peer-to-peer networks and small LANs. if you intend to work with a larger network or WAN. 152 Specialized Solutions. Most larger companies will have a dedicated room for their server (the Server room). The non-routable protocols. on the surface. can all cause a computer to fail or behave erratically. Variable temperatures. which can cause corrosion. it doesn’t really matter. NOS Selection Choosing the network operating system is a matter of user preference. The equipment should be shielded from ESD. the same conditions that are good for people are often ideal for computers. but are not limited.

153 .Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions. Inc.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Putting it all together Installing the media is a task that is often best left to someone who specializes in cable installation.” This is a centrally located room or closet that will house the primary server and hub. This is just a strip of RG-45 connectors. Cable to Computer Depending on the selection of cable. The type of outlet will depend on the type of cable. In most cases. Inc. All the cables will be brought to one location. it will be a wall plate with an RJ-45 outlet. The hub will know that the cable is not connected and will simply ignore it. you will most likely need to install a wall outlet. This way. . Connecting to a computer Cable to Hub The connection of the cables to the hub will usually take place in the “server room. you can install future or optional locations in preparation for expanding. 154 Specialized Solutions. The next step will be a patch cable that runs between the network adapter card and the outlet. the cables are connected to a patch panel. if using CAT 5 or CAT 6. Make sure that either you or the specialist marks each cable at both ends. is that you do not have to install a computer on every outlet. There are a few more components that need to be installed. These outlets will make for a nice and neat installation and will make the room ready to connect a computer to the network. One thing to remember about these patch cables is that their length must be considered as part of the overall length of the cable. Each cable is in turn connected to one of the outlets and a patch cable is then used to connect it to the hub. So let’s assume that you or your specialist has run all the cables. To keep these organized. One advantage of using CAT 5 or CAT 6 cable in a star topology from a hub. This way you can identify each location.

Actually. there are three things to consider: • • • Network Compatibility Media Compatibility Computer Compatibility Connecting to a NIC Specialized Solutions. Because it must connect to both the computer and the media. Inc. there is one more part of the Physical layer that must be installed. Once that is done. This card is a circuit board with all the electronic circuitry and components necessary to physically connect to the computer and the media. we must select a card that is compatible with both. That part is the network adapter card. 155 . Therefore you must know the requirements of each.Chapter 6 – Network Design Connecting to a Hub Network Adapter Cards Installing the cabling for a network is literally installing the Physical layer of the network.

.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 156 Specialized Solutions. Inc.

or three) that indicate the status of the card. there are compatibility issues on both sides of the interface. The different types of cards are designated by the orientation and number of these connections. Before purchasing a network card. also called PC Cards. but only at 10 Mbps. The adapter card (NIC) must be able to communicate on the network using the same standards and protocols as the other components. Resolving these issues is actually quite simple. Some network cards provide diagnostic lights. In general. the number of connectors. the speed of the card is important. Micro Channel. For example. Laptops generally use PCMCIA cards. Note: Laptops and proprietary computers will have special cards designed to fit their architecture. This section will look at compatibility issues. but only at 10 Mbps. Therefore. but requires some knowledge of the inside workings of a computer. Also. the card must be compatible with the computer. Card to Network Network adapter card compatibility is simple. you will have to know the type of expansion slots used in the computer and whether or not there are any free slots. and therefore the speed at which data can be moved. you must have Token Ring cards. The processor (CPU) in a computer will communicate with the expansion cards through the expansion bus. so you will have to check the documentation to be sure of their meaning. The actual connection between the card and the bus is called an expansion slot because of the way the cards are installed. Some of the newer 100BaseTX cards will work on a 10BaseT network. and PCI). Adapter Card Compatibility A network card acts as the interface between the computer and the network. Network cards are designed to meet the standards of the bus. Building across-theboard compatibility for hardware and software at the design stage will simplify future maintenance and troubleshooting. The best way to find out is to remove the case and look. On one side of the circuit card are a group of gold “fingers” that fit into the slot to provide the electrical connection. and expansion projects. will change.Chapter 6 – Network Design Network and Hardware Compatibility Network compatibility is a key consideration in network design. but in the long run this will add significantly to the cost and time requirements of maintenance. administration. Depending on the vintage of the computer. If you are installing a Token Ring network. which can be a useful tool. a Specialized Solutions. a 10 Mbps card (10BaseT) will work on a 100 Mbps network (100BaseTX). Inc. 157 . Not all cards are the same. In addition to being compatible with the network. two. Making incompatible components work together is possible in most instances. This bus is a group of parallel conductors that carry digital information to and from the CPU to all parts of the computer. An Ethernet card simply won’t work on a Token Ring network. These are little LEDs (one. EISA. There are four types of cards that you will encounter (ISA.

it only means that the proper connection has been established between the card and the network. Keep in mind that a green light does not mean that the computer is properly configured and you can use the network. If you must do this manually. You still need to bind the card to the network protocols that you are going to use. be sure that no other device has already been assigned the IRQ or I/O address. Since describing the installation of a network adapter card for every system is beyond the scope of this training course. be sure to follow ESD (electro-static discharge) procedures. you may still have to manually set some jumpers or switches. Each card must be configured for a different network. Install the appropriate drivers for the card. Drivers are usually supplied with the network card. Connect the network cabling. If you don’t have the driver or want to make sure that you have the latest driver. First ensure that it is compatible with your system (network and computer). Physically install the card. In most cases with a new card. you can usually download them from the manufacturer’s web site. Remove the case and install it into a free expansion slot. Card and Computer Installing a network adapter card is not any different than installing any other expansion card in a computer. the following is a generic procedure that defines the key points that you must follow: Purchase the card. the computer may not boot or the conflicting devices might not be able to work simultaneously. Now the network adapter card is installed. . 158 Specialized Solutions. Note: If you must remove the case. Understanding the installation process is the key to preventing conflicts. Many operating systems already include drivers for most network cards. In addition. Hint: you may not want to put the case back on until you have confirmed that the card is working. Note: Many computers that are designated as servers or gateways can have more than one network card installed. Configure the IRQ and I/O address. Finally. if you upgrade your operating system. you will need to check the documentation for the network operating system that you are using. you may need to download a new driver in order to make it work or to increase its performance. You need to configure the card to work with your network software.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide green light indicates that a proper network connection exists and a flashing yellow light indicates that data is being transferred. If your system is not Plug-n-Play. Inc. The details of installation will vary depending on the type of computer and the operating system installed. this will be done with the installation software or by the operating system. but you are not finished yet. If there are any conflicts.

To increase marketability of their cards. A typical problem encountered with highly departmentalized companies is that each department has its own preferences. For Thinnet or Thicknet. Many growing companies purchase their computers only as needed and will select the best buy of the day. the graphics arts department may be Macintosh-based. AppleTalk employs a DIN-type connector and IBM Token Ring uses a DB-9 connector. as some individuals will not want to change their way of doing things just to have a network. While this makes good sense to the accounting department. These types of problems can be more personal in nature. In the case of UTP. it is your responsibility to point out the strengths and weaknesses of each scenario. as well as possible solutions. the decision may end up with the company’s management and you will have to work with it. some manufacturers will provide two. The bottom line is to be sure to look before you buy. different connectors allowing for multiple installation scenarios. and possibly three. and the administrative department may just be thankful for having whatever they could get their hands on.Chapter 6 – Network Design Media Compatibility Media compatibility is the ability of the cabling to physically connect to the card. Specialized Solutions. You may have to connect some older “legacy” hardware with some new high-speed high-tech machines. However. it can create havoc when you have to connect them and actually have them communicate. For example. Computer Compatibility Computer compatibility is often a serious problem encountered when installing a network in an existing facility. If you encounter this type of situation. Some STP cards require special connectors. For example. 159 . the card must have a coaxial BNC connector. the card should have an RJ-45 connector. the engineering department may be PC-based. Inc.

Inc. Your only recourse is to document every computer and piece of hardware that must be connected to the network. hard work and standards. As the network designer or administrator. we learned about network protocols and standards. you should be able to predict potential hardware compatibility problems and take action to prevent them. . 160 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Preventing Compatibility Problems There are really only two methods of resolving compatibility issues. Unless you are very lucky and are installing a new network. As long as the system is designed to meet the same standards. With this done. and detail both its hardware and software. This will most likely require that you remove covers and identify components such as the modem and the network card. Standards are one way in which hardware and software suppliers can develop a product and be assured that it will work with the products of other suppliers. you will need to establish the standards for your network. Hard Work Hard work and attention to detail are your only allies when it comes to setting up a network from an existing system. boot up each computer and note the operating system and any installed software. with identical computers that were purchased from the same supplier. and knowledge of the network operating system. if installed. With this information in hand. Standards Earlier in this training course. that were identically configured. each component will work with the others. you will be assured that any new additions will function properly. By defining the standards to which the network must comply. you are going to have your work cut out for you. You will also need to know the type of processor and the type and number of available expansion slots.

These are the bare minimum requirements to run the system. In this case. network card and/or printer no longer work. The first thing you need to do is determine if the original disks/CD that came with the device has the drivers to match the new operating system. These will be somewhat higher than the required minimum and are what you need to operate the system at a normal performance rate. you will need to check the manufacturer’s recommendations for the minimum requirements to operate. Most hardware compatibility problems are resolved by installing the latest drivers. Microsoft says that you do not need a mouse to run this operating system. The later Windows operating systems require a mouse as one of the minimum requirements. however. only that if you don’t meet these requirements.Chapter 6 – Network Design Resolving Compatibility Problems No matter how careful you are. Most manufacturers will also publish suggested minimum requirements. Inc. If drivers exist. when upgrading from Windows 98 to Windows XP. 161 . you will be able to locate and download them from the manufacturer’s web site. A good example is Windows 95. Drivers for a particular device are not always available for all operating systems. have you ever tried it? You can run Windows 95 without a mouse by using only keystrokes. Some devices do not have drivers for all operating systems. These requirements by no means indicate what you should purchase. you will need to upgrade. there are several web sites that specialize in downloading drivers. you probably do not have the necessary drivers. the system will not run. The networking industry is in a constant state of change and unless you want to be left behind. If the operating system was released after you purchased the device. More than likely. the Internet is the answer. but your proficiency will be very low. all you need to do is install the Windows XP drivers for the offending hardware. sooner or later you will encounter compatibility problems. Specialized Solutions. you find that your modem. Minimum Requirements When evaluating or considering an upgrade or change of an operating system. You should always confirm the availability of drivers before purchasing an unknown device. Also. This is a true statement. For example.

is the Microsoft Windows Catalog at www. If you were to purchase an econo-version of a computer or one that is highly proprietary.com/windows/catalog. or hardware compatibility lists. An operating system such as Microsoft Windows 2000 is hardware dependent. Here you will find the latest information about hardware and software that is Designed for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 or at least tested to be compatible with these operating systems. It is considered an advanced operating system and will not work with all hardware. you will need to check the HCL for that product. it most likely will not work with Windows 2000. Inc. This list will ship with the 2000 package (on the CD-ROM) and 2000 will make a check during installation. To assist in making an informed purchasing decision. Microsoft Windows Catalog Still another web site to check for compatibility of hardware and software. you can get it from one of Microsoft’s web sites. If you want the latest list. You can also look for the corresponding logos on the boxes of hardware and software that you are considering purchasing for your network. especially with the newest operating systems such as Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. or to confirm whether or not your existing hardware will work with Windows 2000. . This is part of the Windows Logo program.microsoft. 162 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following table lists an example of the minimum requirements for three operating systems: HCL and Windows 2000 To help alleviate compatibility issues some manufacturers provide HCLs.

Inc. 163 .Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions.

Why should you refuse this offer? 8. Your company just bought ten new computers and all are guaranteed to meet the minimum requirements of Windows XP. However. Is NetBEUI a good protocol to use with a large WAN? 6. What are the two tools required to initiate a network design? 2. Your accounting office found a really good deal on network cards. he intends to expand the network in the future. Your client is installing a small Ethernet network and trying to save money at the same time. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 6 1. What are the two areas of concern when starting a network project? 3. What is the number one reason for choosing a client/server network? 5. What are the two most prominent reasons to choose a peer-to-peer network? 4. Was this a good purchase? 9. How do you know if a new piece of hardware will work with Windows XP? 164 Specialized Solutions. You are expanding your network and will need to invest in 50 to 100 new network cards. but they are not all the same. . 7. Give one reason why you should recommend that he spend a little more now and install CAT 6 cabling instead of CAT 5.

165 . This chapter will discuss several techniques for expanding a network. sooner or later. to larger hubs that can connect many more computers. it may be too small.Expanding a Network No matter how well you design a network.” you may also hear them referred to as: • • • • Concentrators MAU or MSAU– Multistation Access Unit (Token Ring) Patch Panel SMAU – a Smart MAU Hubs can be either active or passive. Passive hubs do not use external power and are used only to concentrate the cables in a common location. Specialized Solutions. In addition to being called “hubs. A hub is a device that acts like the central station for all computers on the network. Inc. you cannot use an Ethernet hub on a Token Ring network. Active hubs can be used to extend the length of network cabling by connecting them in a series. For example.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Chapter 7 . from simple five-connector hubs used to connect five devices. There are several different types of hubs. Expanding a LAN with Hubs A common method for expanding networks is to use a hub. An active hub will require power and will often provide some form of signal conditioning (amplifies weak signals).

the simple hub just won’t do the job. You are just plain tired of your old system and want to get your system updated. there are several other devices that can be used to expand a network. have increased response times.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide When a LAN is Too Small There are several reasons to consider expanding a LAN: • • • • Too much network traffic. but has one additional feature. such as databases. They do however. Bridges work in the Data Link Layer of the OSI model. thus reducing the traffic for each segment. A bridge can be used to isolate segments on a LAN. Fortunately. They do not translate or filter any information. When the time comes to make a serious expansion to a LAN. amplify the signal. Repeaters work in the Physical Layer of the OSI model. Each has its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Repeaters A repeater is a device that is used to extend the cable length on a network. . Inc. Repeater Bridges A bridge does the same things as a repeater. 166 Specialized Solutions. Depending on the objectives of the LAN. Long waits to access a printer or file. thereby compensating for signal loss due to long cable lengths. you will have to employ one or more different pieces of hardware. Traffic-generating applications.

Routers can also determine the best path for “routing” traffic and filter broadcast traffic on the local segment.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Bridge Routers A router has all of the features of a bridge. Inc. Routers work at the Network layer of the OSI model. Router Gateway Gateways make it possible to connect different network architectures. Think of a gateway as a computer that acts as a translator between two networks that don’t speak the same language. but it can switch packets across multiple networks. Not all network protocols will work with a router. 167 . the NetBEUI protocol is not routable. For example. It is an entrance to another network that controls traffic on your network. Specialized Solutions.

or dedicated. Just because the cost looks good. They are providing the cabling. but connecting at this rate is rare. . Keep in mind that there are many carrier companies that provide many different services at a variety of rates. With dial-up networking. does not mean that it is the best value.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Gateway Connection Services When expanding a network beyond the local area cable boundaries. these connections are slow and not very reliable. When considering which connection service to use. lines. Typically. 168 Specialized Solutions. it is likely that you will need to connect to a third party’s cabling system. The first is public dial-up network lines. Some of the newer digital services will claim to have a speed of 56 Kbps. These powerful full-time dedicated connections do not use a series of switches to complete the connection. microwave. These are our standard telephone connections. the distance the data must travel. be sure to take into account your throughput. Inc. each computer must use a modem and establish a direct connection. An example of such a system is the telephone company. and satellite connections. Carriers Carriers are the companies that we contract with to carry our data over long distances. When thinking of a carrier. When thinking of telephone lines. there are two levels of service to consider. Be sure to compare them on an equal basis and look for hidden costs. Be careful when choosing a carrier. we most commonly think of our local telephone company or one of the long distance carriers. and the cost of the service. Speed for leased lines can reach 45 Mbps. The second choice is leased.

and deals with timing issues. as well as those transmitted to it. It can regenerate the signal. if necessary. A CSU/DSU (Channel Service Unit/Data Service Unit) is a hardware device responsible for changing the frame type from whatever the LAN is using into a frame that will work on the WAN. 169 . You can also use ISDN adapters if you are using ISDN PRI for WAN connectivity. The CSU is responsible for both the signals received from the WAN. Specialized Solutions. It also changes the frame type back when frames are sent back. Most WANs are a collection of LANs. Inc. These physically larger networks will appear to function the same as a LAN. The DSU is responsible for converting both the input and output between the frame types between the LAN and the WAN. Communication between LANs will involve one of the following technologies: • • • Analog Digital Packet Switching Analog Connectivity Analog communication is the one that we are most familiar with. There are two types of PSTN: dial-up lines and dedicated analog lines. items such as bridges. It is based on PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). routers and communications services are used to create a WAN.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network WAN Overview When the physical capabilities and distance limits of a LAN need to be exceeded. WAN links can include any of the following: • • • • • Cable Television Coaxial Systems Fiber-Optic Cable Microwave Transmitters Packet Switched Networks Satellite Links Those using a WAN link to connect LANs will need to use CSU/DSUs.

Voice and video. you need DDS (Digital Data Service). Inc. Application relays. but if you have sufficient traffic. This is because you lease the line 100% of the time and therefore do not have to dial-in.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Analog Signal The dial-up lines can be further classified as: Line Type Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic voice. The primary reason for using digital lines is that they are 99% error-free. they can be justified. Voice and data over trunks between computers. Voice/radio with tone conditioning. Data applications below 1200 bps. Voice and data over trunk circuits. The down-side of these lines is that you will have to pay for them 100% of the time instead of on an “as used” basis. more secure line than can be provided by an analog connection. 170 Specialized Solutions. Dedicated lines are far more expensive. Digital Connectivity When you need a faster. Basic data. Dedicated analog lines provide an instant connection. Voice and data over private lines. . Voice with some quality control.

Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Digital Signal T1 is the most widely used type of digital line.368 Mbps Varies depending ISP.544 Mbps 44. Specialized Solutions. data.520 or 622. Inc.048 Mbps 34. The following table lists the most common connection types: Connection Type T1 T3 E1 E3 XDSL T1/E1/OC1 Channels 1 28 1 16 N/A Voice Channels DATA RATE (MBPS) 24 672 32 512 N/A 1.8 Mbps 155.736 Mbps 2.52 Mbps Either 155. It is capable of 1.080 (can reach 10 Gbps) OC-1 OC-3 ATM 1 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A The T1 and the T3 standard are American. It can be used to transmit digital voice. and video signals. 171 . whereas the E1 and the E3 are the European standard.544 Mbps transmissions. faster download than upload 51.

For this reason. Frame Relay does not check the packet at each step in its route. Today’s networks use a different technology referred to as Frame Relay. since the infrastructure of the phone line we use today was created long before the advent of the personal computer and the Internet. This made for a very reliable and very slow connection. be used for somewhat secure remote access by employing the use of virtual private networks (VPNs) and tunneling protocols. this particular type of network is not suited for most companies’ business needs. 172 Specialized Solutions. . each packet was examined at each step in the path to determine whether it was damaged. Inc. POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) or the telephone lines are the most common example of this type of network. Obviously. Standard PSTN lines have a very limited bandwidth of less than 56 Kbps. Circuit-switched Network Packet Switching Networks Packet switching is a means of providing fast.25 based packet switched networks. a packet may be sent over multiple permanent virtual circuits (PVCs). X. A packet switched network provides multiple paths that packets could travel from source to destination. convenient. however. In older. and reliable network messaging. all of which are considered reliable.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Circuit-switched Networks Circuit-switched networks set up a continuous direct connection between the individual calling and the one being called. so it can be both reliable and fast. These lines can. With Frame Relay.

printers.) by another means apart from how they are connected physically and geographically. or by the specific use of the computers. adding computers or adjusting resources. It is best understood as a “logical” LAN. 173 .Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Packet Switching VLAN Virtual LANs (VLANs) can be viewed as a group of devices on different physical LAN segments that can communicate with each other as if they were all on the same physical LAN segment. etc. An administrator might set up a VLAN based on certain departments within his company. which lays out hosts (computers.” Specialized Solutions. This allows the administrator the luxury of modifying the VLAN. Inc. This type of network is most closely associated with a “campus environment. without having to change the physical picture of the network. or any other logical means.

audio. ATM can be used with FAX. As well as the common voice and data. they currently operate at as high as 622 Mbps with most commercial boards operating at 155 Mbps. . which is intended for use in the home or small business. while using copper telephone wires. These cells can speed communication because the network always know exactly what to expect in regard the size of the next cell. Inc. you might consider some of the advanced WAN technologies. twisted pair. It was designed specifically for Token Ring networks and has a maximum ring length of 100 Kilometers (62 miles).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide VLAN Advanced WAN Environments If the existing services available do not meet the needs of your WAN. This means that the choice of media will limit the maximum speed of the network. in actuality. it is a good choice for LANs that require large bandwidth and high speeds. has two 64 Kbps 174 Specialized Solutions. and focuses on the home and business market. ATM is not media dependent and will operate on coaxial. ATM is relatively new and will require special hardware and bandwidth to reach its full potential. video. however. it will provide a secure network that is immune to interference. It will support 500 computers and run at 100 Mbps.Fiber Distributed Data Interface is the basis of fiber optic communication. While not a good choice for WANs. One of these may just provide you with the necessary bandwidth and speed that you need.2 Gbps.Asynchronous transfer mode uses fixed length (53 byte) cells instead of packets. However. ATM . It is. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface). FDDI . and imaging. These systems are designed to operate at a throughput rate of 1. media limited. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network was one of the early digital services. or fiber optic. Because it is fiber optic-based.

It carries all the bits from say. data and video at rates ranging from 51.84 Mbps (OC-1) all the way up to 40 Gbps (OC-768). and one 64 Kbps D-channel for control.Switched Multimegabit Data Service offers high bandwidth at speeds of up to 34 Mbps.6). much like E1 is to T1. SMDS SMDS . 175 . like OCx with SONET. which is intended for use by large businesses. SDH SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) is a standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. Specialized Solutions. SONET SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) is a fiber optic-based technology that specifies the speeds at which the equipment can multiplex signals from sources into high-speed carrier devices. This service is provided by some local companies and works well for MAN installations (compatible with IEEE 802. Internationally. has twentythree 64 Kbps B-channels for data or voice (1. ISDN PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It is capable of transmitting voice.544 Mbps). Inc. To be more precise. it is the European equivalent of SONET. and one 16 Kbps D-channel for control.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network B-channels for data or voice (128 Kbps). The data-rate can vary anywhere from STM-1 (155 Mbps) up to STM-64 (10 Gbps). it is considered the equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network. within one transmission frame. It includes a set of signal rate multiples for transmitting digital signals on optical fiber (OCx). It uses Synchronous Transport Modules (STM). a call.

The problem with these devices is that they all have limitations that prevent long distance communication.32bis bps 2400 9600 Notes An old standard. As we have already learned. .32 standard. This limit cannot be exceeded without encountering signal distortion. the Baud rate was equal to the bps. With this change.600 bps.600 bps. there is a limit of 2400 Baud. A modem is a device that makes it possible to communicate long distances over standard telephone lines or cable. modems have reached a new technology limit of 56. 176 Specialized Solutions. Therefore. The following is a list of common “V” ratings: Standard V. The name is derived from the words MOdulate and DEModulate. Modems transmit data at various speeds. etc. or over long distances. Sometimes included with the purchase of a computer. The Baud rate equals the frequency in cycles per second that can be transmitted via telephone lines. network cards.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Modems Expanding a network requires an understanding of the additional devices necessary to make the connections. and media. due to the physical characteristics of copper wire and the effects of transmitting signals over long distances. designers learned how to place several signals within one cycle. 14. Modems are classified by a “V” rating.400 bps. These speeds are measured as bits per second. connecting a few computers to form a local area network requires cabling and network cards. To overcome this and increase the speeds of data transmission via modems.22bis V. FAX modems will send and receive data at speeds up to 14. Convert the parallel digital data into serial digital data. a given Baud rate could transmit data at 2. requires some additional hardware that will overcome the limitations of the cables. To increase our network beyond a few computers. the term Baud has disappeared and been replaced with bps. However. Some of the basic functions of a modem are to: • • Convert digital signals used by computers into analog signals that can be transmitted via telephone lines. Inc. Speeds will range from very slow speeds of 300 bps to 56. times as fast as the Baud rate.32 V. With early modems. Originally modem speeds were measured in terms of Baud. Modems are available in both internal (standard expansion card) and external (connected to a serial port and has its own power supply) versions. Sometimes included with the purchase of a computer. 8.400 High-speed version of the V. Today. 4.

Backwards compatible with earlier V.600 Backwards compatible with earlier V.FastClass. Will only communicate with another V. 177 .42 V. 56.200 Not officially a standard yet. Inc. 57.32terbo V.32terbo. modems – error correction standard. 28. Specialized Solutions.800 Improved V.600 56K modem standard – resolved competition for standard between US Robotic X2 and Rockwell K56 Flex standards.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network V.90 19.34 V. modems.

You may be more familiar with the term dial-up network (DUN). both of these terms mean the same thing. Both computers will have to run compatible software so that one will act as a server and the other as a client. the server that you call (your Internet Service Provider) is providing a RAS connection to you – it is the server that is providing the connection to the Internet for you. Dial-up networking is the client-side of the connection. or directly via COM ports and a cable. RAS Connection Connecting Two Computers Establishing a remote connection can be either between two computers or between a remote computer and a network. By running Network Connections Wizard and following the simple 178 Specialized Solutions. For example. A COM port is a 9pin male connector (it can be 25-pin but this is not as common as the 9-pin) on the back of the computer. Since the two computers are directly connected. A system running Windows XP or Windows 95/98 will allow only one inbound connection. The difference between a simple computer (Windows XP or Windows 95/98) and a RAS server (such as Windows Server 2003) is the number of inbound connections. With RAS. . so this cable eliminates that part of a modem connection. when you access your Internet connection from your computer at home (via a modem connection) you are establishing a dial-up connection –you are the client. either via modems and telephone lines. The trick is that you cannot use just any cable with 9-pin female connectors. Actually. the computer is acting as a server or gateway to a network and will receive calls via a modem from other computers. In addition. Also. There are many off-the-shelf software packages that will perform this type of communication.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Remote Access Computing (RAS) One of the most common forms of expanding a network is through a Remote Access Server. The difference is how each computer is being utilized. all you need to do is connect a cable between a COM port on each computer. This is a specially wired cable that actually replaces the modem. the COM port provides the parallel to serial data conversion that is necessary to complete a connection. When connecting two computers in close proximity (same room or building). Any two computers can be connected. On the other hand. or RAS (pronounced RAZ) connection. Windows XP has an feature called a direct cable connection. Inc. Let’s first look at connecting two computers. while a true server like Windows Server 2003 will allow 256 inbound connections. You must use a Null-Modem cable. there will be no need to connect to telephone wires or dial a number.

you will use a modem to establish the connection. the RAS software must be installed and running. The server you are contacting may be an individual computer or a server that provides access to a larger network. the client computer will establish the connection via DUN software. Normally. your computer will have to make the phone call and provide the necessary security authentication information to the server. On the client side.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network instructions provided. Direct Cable Connection Making a RAS connection to a server is similar to a direct connection but. Windows (95/98 and NT) has an accessory called Dial-Up Networking. you can connect any two Windows-based computers and share data with only a cable connection. 179 . you can set up the proper configuration for the connection and dial the appropriate number. This is a relatively old standard (1984). the server will answer the phone and allow the connection if you are an authorized user. but is still in use with some systems. On the server side. RAS/DUN supports various connection protocols to ensure proper connections and security. These protocols are: • • • • • • • • • SLIP (Single Line Interface Protocol) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) L2TP (Layer Two Tunneling Protocol) SSL (Secure Socket Layer) TLS (Transport Layer Security) Kerberos (Greek mythology – three-headed canine who guards Hades’ gates) ICA (Independent Computing Architecture) SLIP (Single Line Interface Protocol) Serial Line Interface Protocol is a standard protocol for connections using TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). While this was the protocol of choice for a Specialized Solutions. in this case. From this accessory. both computers must be using the same protocol. RAS Protocols In order for any connection to work. With this in place. Inc.

It provides security. in today’s networks it has several disadvantages. PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) The Point-to-Point Protocol was designed as an upgraded protocol to SLIP. It supports encrypted passwords. as a less explensive alternative to costly leased lines. Inc. NetBEUI. Some of these improvements include: • • • • Support for TCP/IP. AppleTalk. such that only the sender and the receiver can accurately interpret the data that is being sent. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) provides for a secure encrypted tunnel for communication through the Internet. It provides data compression and error control. This is accomplished by encapsulating one protocol with another protocol. the limits of SLIP caused many problems. Secure transmission over TCP/IP networks.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide long time. RAS and Security. With the rapid growth of the Internet and remote communications. Many organizations are using tunnels. VPN (Virtual Private Networks). PPP was intended to overcome these limitations and is very common today. IPX. Encrypted Connections. created by PPTP and other tunneling protocols. It can be used in conjunction with VPNs (Virtual Private 180 Specialized Solutions. • • • • • IPsec IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a framework of open standards for security at the Network layer of the OSI model. . It is designed to protect IP packets as well as to provide defense against network attacks. It enables highly private network links over the public Internet. It supports only TCP/IP. and DECnet. It’s only supported by RAS clients. Some of these disadvantages include: • • • • • It requires a static IP address for each node. It cannot encrypt logon information. It transmits in text only.

ICA can be used with Windows. It is included in both Microsoft’s Internet Explorer and Netscape’s Navigator and it is a complimentary addition to HTTPS. Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Active Directory use this type of security by default. IPsec allows for either ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) or AH (Authentication Header). limited RAM. L2TP offers many advantages over PPTP. It can work with SSL and uses Triple DES encryption (three 56-bit keys). most relating to higher security. usually a user’s credit card number.. It combines Cisco’s Layer 2 Forwarding (L2F) with PPTP. Inc. Unlike PPTP. Kerberos Kerberos is a secure method for authenticating a request for a service in a computer network. which is the highest security method. AH only authenticates the user. it does not require IP connectivity. It is transparent to the user. or virtual proof-of-identity cards so the user can request a service from a server. It allows a user to request an encrypted ticket.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Networks) and remote access for users who need access to resources on a private network. a bare-bones operating system (such as Windows CE). discussed here in the next chapter. it only establishes the user’s identity. ESP. and a processor in the range of 200 MHz to 300 MHz. Thin clients are computers with no hard drive. Kerberos V5. L2TP Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is the latest version of the tunneling protocol. . TLS TLS (Transport Layer Security) is the evolution of SSL. meaning that the computers. It uses a key to encrypt the data. 181 . and Macintosh computers. ICA (Independent Computing Architecture) ICA is a remote connection established using Citrix software (like WinFrame or MetaFrame) and a thin client environment. both sending and receiving.509) and preshared keys can be used for authentication in conjunction with IPsec. are the ones aware of the IPsec transmission. It does not provide authorization. as does Novell Directory Services (NDS). It functions at the Data-link layer of the OSI model and is used in conjunction with VPNs. It is based on an end-to-end security model. certificates (like X. UNIX. SSL The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol for addressing the security of an Internet transmission between a client and a server. authenticates the sender of data and encrypts the data as well. Linux. Specialized Solutions.

The type of communication port you intend to configure. therefore ensuring that the connection is legitimate. If it does not work the first time. At a minimum you will need to know the following: • • • Your modem specifications including having the appropriate drivers for your network and/or computer operating system. This audit can include who signed on and when they signed on. Callback Security One method of providing both security and cost control is to require the server to callback anyone that attempts to logon. Installing and Configuring RAS Installing RAS on a server is dependent on the network operating system installed on the server. installing RAS can be frustrating. 182 Specialized Solutions. . Before installation. This provides for additional authentication. All it takes is one number or check mark out of place to prevent the connection from working properly. you will have to collect all the information from your operating system supplier to ensure that you have everything necessary. This is a great benefit for those who travel for business and need access to the network. your new RAS system may not be able to gain access. the modem configuration. This feature can also be used to ensure long distance charges are charged to the company rather than the caller. and any other software that might use the modem. Security Host (Bastion Host) A security host or bastion host is a separate server that works between the RAS server and the client. you can restrict the numbers that RAS will call. RAS provides several layers of security. Be sure to check everything including the RAS configuration. If another software package has “control” of the modem. you must implement or enable them during configuration of the RAS server. Inc. As with all security measures. you will need to collect data on the type of connection you intend to make and the specifics of the computer hardware and network. you will have to carefully go through all the configuration parameters and check every one. Here is a summary of RAS security functions: Auditing The server can create and maintain an audit trail of all connections.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide In addition to providing remote sharing of information. and thus more security. Are there any client protocols that will have to be enabled? • What are the security requirements of the connection/network? Troubleshooting a RAS setup While not usually complicated. In addition. By requiring RAS to call back to the client that is requesting a connection.

it is not always the solution for every network. you want to keep the costs down.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Limitations of RAS As good as RAS is. You should consider RAS when your bandwidth is less than 128 Kbps. Inc. you will need to understand both its strengths and weaknesses. The latest Microsoft server operating systems such as Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 have wizards that make installing an RAS server much simpler. and you don’t need a fulltime connection. 183 . Specialized Solutions. As a networking professional.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc. Keyword Analog Signal Bridge Carrier Concentrator CSU/DSU Digital Signal DUN Frame Relay Gateway Hubs ICA Ipsec ISDN Kerberos L2TP MAU PPP PPTP RAS Repeater Router SDH 184 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Definition .

Inc. 185 .Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Keyword SLIP SMAU SONET SSL T1 VLAN X.25 Definition Specialized Solutions.

186 Specialized Solutions. A form of digital line that is capable of 1.544 Mbps transmissions is called? 6. Name four forms of RAS security. Define a repeater. . What is analog communication? 5. a bridge. 7. 4. 9. Describe the difference between BAUD and bps. What is the difference between an active hub and a passive hub? 3. Name three advanced WAN environments. 10. and a gateway. What is the difference between a hub and a MAU? 2.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 7 1. What are the two components of remote network accessing? 8. Inc. Name three RAS protocols. a router.

Inc.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Specialized Solutions. 187 .

.

SNMP. TCP/IP is now the standard on all versions of UNIX. TCP/IP is a routable protocol that provides full duplex connections.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Introduction to TCP/IP TCP/IP is an internet (between network) protocol. Inc. and the Internet. these protocols were available on UNIX early on. TCP/IP is an open protocol and is considered to be an industry standard. Although RFCs are not true standards (they are documents that describe work in progress). are the responsibility of the IAB (Internet Activities Board). Also. Each layer maps to one or more layers of the OSI model. 189 . The TCP/IP protocol suite includes a number of protocols. such as SMTP. it has evolved into the protocol of the Internet. Specialized Solutions. known as BSD UNIX. TCP/IP. the recognized standard for internetworking altogether. TCP is built on top of IP (Internet Protocol). intranets. Its popularity is largely attributed to the fact that it is not owned by a specific vendor. RFC (Request For Comments) A series of documents called RFCs (Request For Comments) serve as the standards that were used in the development of TCP/IP. which will be discussed later in the chapter. These standards. and were even built into the Berkeley Standard Distribution. some are considered to be Internet standards. This is the most common protocol suite with which a networking professional works. and FTP. It is important for the networking professional to know that TCP/IP is used on the Internet and that it can be used with almost any network operating system. TCP/IP was designed to accommodate a large internetworking environment comprising several different types of computers. Full duplex means that data can travel in both directions at once. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is the most common Transport layer protocol (based on the OSI Model). and is in fact. as well as Internet standards. From this beginning. It is also used with Ethernet networks. The four layers are: Application. TCP/IP was developed by the Department of Defense agency (DARPA) in the 1960s as part of a military research project. Transport. and is usually seen in the combination. Internet and Network Interface. The TCP/IP suite consists of four layers.

Transmission Control Protocol UDP – User Datagram Protocol IP – Internet Protocol ICMP – Internet Control Message Protocol ARP – Address Resolution Protocol 190 Specialized Solutions. Inc. There are actually five protocols that work within these layers to provide network connections. . These five protocols are: • • • • • TCP.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP and OSI The four layers that make up TCP/IP provide a guideline for this model.

191 . Inc.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Specialized Solutions.

It then routes the information to its destination. or into even smaller units of measurement called datagrams. TCP operates by first establishing a connection-oriented session through the use of ports and sockets. you will not have to be an expert on the workings of TCP/IP. Port numbers are generally predetermined and correspond to a specific service that is running on a machine. The following list provides a few examples: For: FTP TELNET SMTP HTTP POP3 Use Port 21 23 25 80 110 192 Specialized Solutions. This data exchange can be verified at various checkpoints. Port numbers for some protocols are better known than others. TCP Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) functions at the Transport Layer of the OSI Model. Its job is to ensure that data transferred from one computer to another reaches its destination intact. However. you will need to know the various protocols and how they relate to the OSI model. and for the Network+ exam. the origination point and destination point of the computers between which data travels are called ports. there are five major protocols used within TCP/IP. called packets. . It will then use the concept of sliding windows and acknowledgements to ensure fast and accurate data transmission. Inc. Let’s take a look at how this works. Let’s take a look at them. and reassembles the data. The Top Five TCP/IP Protocols As mentioned earlier. Should lost or corrupted packets be detected. A port is a virtual outlet that can be opened on a network device.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP Protocols As a network technician. On a TCP/IP network. they can be retransmitted in a timely manner. TCP breaks data into tiny chunks.

Connection-Oriented Communication means that direct communication is established between two machines. Acknowledgements are used to ensure the reliability of the data being transmitted. and the receiving computer’s address is called the destination port number. IP Internet Protocol (IP) is the Network layer part of TCP/IP. inserting its own header into the datagram when it is received from TCP. IP is connectionless. FTP.. UDP transports data.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials The sending computer’s address is called the source port number. Both machines have a sending and receiving window to buffer the data flow. nor does it check for errors. TCP tells IP that the data has arrived at its destination. and specify a certain protocol. IP merely routes the data.535. Think of it as a return receipt like the one you get from the Post Office when you want to be sure that a package has been delivered. When you open a dial-up connection to the Internet. TCP will retransmit the data. A socket is the combination of an IP address and a port number. HTTP. The well-known ports are associated with the range of possible port numbers from 0 through 1023. UDP packets are delivered through ports and sockets and do not require the opening of a session. etc. the protocol number. The advantage of UDP over TCP is speed and is often used when transmitting streaming audio or video. The IP header consists of the source and destination addresses. but does not acknowledge delivery. and a Specialized Solutions. This communication is called a session and is used to provide guaranteed delivery between the two machines. For each packet sent. which is responsible for moving the data from its origination point to its destination point. Telnet. “port” and “socket” are often used interchangeably. a port is different from a socket. Sliding windows are used to increase the speed of data transfer. The private or dynamic ports are associated with the range from 49152 through 65535. The port number identifies the application associated with the data. Inc. meaning that it establishes an end-to-end connection and starts transmitting without swapping control information. Transmission speed is increased by sending a window of information at a time without having to get an acknowledgment back for each packet. you are automatically connected to the correct port for that particular data type. This allows a receiving machine to collect packets out of order and hold them in a buffer until all packets in a specified group are received. i.e. an acknowledgement of receipt is returned. consist of a unique 16-bit numeric address ranging from 0 to 65. Although the terms. or port numbers. Both machines keep track of the data so that any packets not received can be resent. UDP User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless protocol residing on the Transport layer of the OSI Model. The addresses. If the transmission has not been successful. 193 . The registered ports are associated with the range from 1024 through 49151.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide checksum. The IP header is necessary so that gateways are able to determine where to route the datagram. Note: A checksum is simply a calculation that is performed on data by the sending computer. To be more specific, the checksum is the answer that is derived from this calculation. When the data arrives at the destination computer, the receiving computer performs the calculation. If the checksum is the same, the data is assumed to have arrived intact. The following are key elements of IP: Addressing – provides the address of both the sending and receiving machines. Broadcast – provides broadcast addressing within a network segment. Fragmenting and Reassembly – if data packets are too large for the underlying network, it will be broken down into a manageable packet size for transport. Routeability – provides routing information from one network to another. Time to Live – provides TTL data. This defines the number of hops a packet can make before it is discarded. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is part of the Internet layer. It is responsible for errors and messages regarding delivery of IP datagrams. ARP The Address Resolution Protocol is responsible for keeping track of the mapping of IP addresses to physical addresses. Each device on the network maintains an ARP cache. This cache contains a list of all the devices with which it is communicating. The contents of a cache can be displayed by using the ARP.exe command in Windows or the /sbin/arp command under UNIX. Other TCP/IP Protocols In addition to the top five, TCP/IP uses several other protocols: POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 (POP3) allows the client computer to retrieve E-mail from a POP3 server using a temporary connection. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) is also a protocol for accessing email from your local server. Your Internet server holds your incoming email until users logon and download it. It is more advanced than POP3 because you can use folders and mailboxes on the server, run searches, or access multiple mail servers. 194 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials POP and IMAP allow a client to pull their mail from a server. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), a protocol for transferring e-mail between points on the Internet, which is what you use when you send out mail. SMTP is server to server, whereas POP or IMAP are client to server. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a server-to-server protocol that acts under the control of the message transport system. SMTP is used to transfer E-mail between computers, usually over the Internet. An easy way to think of it is SMTP stands for “Send Mail To People.” SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the Internet protocol that manages nodes (individual computers) on an IP network. SNMP is not limited to TCP/IP. FTP File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a client-server protocol that allows a user to transfer files from one computer to another over a TCP/IP network. The user accesses a special directory hierarchy containing public access files, by typing in a user name, or the word “anonymous.” The password is the user’s E-mail address. Files may then be uploaded or downloaded between the computers. HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is a client-server protocol that is used on the World Wide Web (www) to access HTML documents, such as web pages. HTTPS HTTPS (Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts, using SSL as a sub layer underneath HTTP, allowing access to a secure Web server. It uses port 443, the secure SSL port instead of port 80, the HTTP port. HTTPS, as well as SSL, allow for the use of X.509 digital certificates for authentication of a user.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

195

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

196

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials

Naming Systems
Naming conventions and addressing is a large part of networking and TCP/IP. Remember, we are working in two worlds, the computer world of numbers and our world of user-friendly names. Understanding the difference between these two worlds and how to work in both of them is an important part of networking. DNS Domain Name Service (DNS) is a network service that translates hostnames to IP addresses over a TCP/IP network. The network administrator defines and configures the DNS settings using a standardized lookup table. DNS functions like a telephone directory. The network administrator need only remember the host and domain names. A domain name server is a computer that "remembers" the user-friendly names of the other computers and their IP address numbers. For example, the domain bigcompany.com may have an IP address of 192.49.238.33. This allows users to simply remember the userfriendly name while the domain name server remembers the numbers used by the network computers. A domain is a group of computers that share a common general purpose, such as government, education, commerce, or interest. Internet domains are established in a hierarchical order. A Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) consists of a hostname and a domain name. The Internet Network Information Center (InterNIC, also known as Network Solutions) controls the top-level domains. These domains require suffixes such as .com for businesses or .edu for educational institutions. It is also common practice for various companies to register domain names for you.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

197

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following table lists some Internet domains:

.com .net .edu .org .gov .mil .biz .pro .info .xx

Commercial Organizations Networks (The backbone of the Internet.) Educational Institutions Non-profit Organizations Non-military Government Organizations Military Government Organizations Businesses Professional Information services Two Letter Country Code For instance, Big Company Inc. in Italy might be http://www.Bigcompany.com.it or in Australia www.Bigcompany.com.au. Also, .tv is gaining in popularity. Tuvalu is a small country, which receives financial benefit from the registration fees.

WINS In a Windows-based network, the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is used to resolve NetBIOS computer names to their IP addresses. This is a dynamic service and requires that the workstation register with the WINS server each time it logs on to the network. NETBIOS NetBIOS defines a session-level interface and a session management/data transport protocol so computers can converse in session mode or send messages without connection in datagram mode, leaving the responsibility for error-checking up to the application. A NetBIOS name is a unique 16-byte address (only 15 can be used for the actual name) used to identify a NetBIOS resource on a network. There are four node types: B-node (broadcast), P-node (peer-peer), M-node (mixed – B and P) and H-node (hybrid – P and B). 198 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials HOSTS file HOSTS file is a static text file that maps host names to IP. It predates DNS. It must be manually created and changed. LMHOSTS file LMHOSTS is static text file that are used to look up and resolve NetBIOS names and IP addresses. It predates WINS and is rarely used today. It must be manually created and changed. IP Gateway A gateway is used to connect two networks with dissimilar protocols. For example, it could connect a LAN to the Internet. In order for a gateway to work with the Internet, it must be assigned a static IP address. This means that it is permanently assigned. It would be difficult to find if it were constantly changing. DHCP Assigning IP addresses is like assigning telephone numbers, sooner or later we will run out of numbers. In smaller isolated networks, IP address assignment is not a big problem and each workstation or device can have a static address. However, as the number of addresses required increases, you will sooner or later come up with a number shortage. To resolve this, IP addresses can be dynamically assigned. That is, assigned on an “as needed” basis. Each host will lease an address only for the period of time required. When not needed, the address can be leased to another host. To accomplish this, you will need to use Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP). Upon logon a DHCP server will provide a client with an IP address, subnet mask, and a default gateway if needed. Notice that the IP addresses are leased. This means that they will expire after a specific amount of time. This is to prevent one user from monopolizing the connection. A lease can be renewed. When the term of the lease is at 50%, the client will send a request for renewal. If the demand for connections is low (there are spaces available), the lease will be renewed without interruption. If not renewed, the client will attempt to contact the DHCP server that issued it the IP address directly about every 5 minutes until it reaches 87.5% of the lease, at which time the client will broadcast a request to obtain an address from any available DHCP server. If all addresses are being used or a DHCP server does not respond, the lease will expire and the address will be assigned to another user. In this case, the original user will have to wait for an opening before getting another lease and a new IP address. BOOTP BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) is a protocol that is used by diskless workstations to obtain their IP addresses (as well as the server’s address and its default gateway) from a BOOTP server. BOOTP was the foundation of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

199

Compare this to a “he said-she said” scenario where an intermediary delivers the message between two parties who do not speak directly to each other. It can also work in conjunction with Routing and Remote access. depending on the direction in which the communication is traveling at any given time. IP Proxy Servers Earlier. Actually. NAT.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Connection Utilities NAT NAT (Network Address Translation) is the translation of an IP address used within an organization internally (private IP address) to an IP seen by the Internet (public IP address). like a LAN. who think they are communicating directly with one another.e. to share a single connection to the Internet. . It contains DHCP. 200 Specialized Solutions. it serves many clients through only one connection. The proxy server is actually making a connection to another network or to the Internet on behalf of the client. the proxy server. The user is connecting to the Internet via a secondary source. Proxy Server ICS ICS allows computers within a network. ICS allows multiple users to fully utilize that connection by performing different tasks at the same time. and DNS. In the case of a proxy server. a NAT is just a device or program that translates one set of IP addresses to another set of IP addresses. The proxy server is a liaison between the two parties. It allows for use of one public IP address for many private IP addresses. but it is most often used between a private network and the networks public address or addresses. i. The proxy server may function in the role of the server or the client. since it keeps the private IP addresses hidden from the outside world. Inc. we talked about the client/server relationship in terms of the roles of various users and servers. NAT also acts as a type of firewall.

Inc.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Specialized Solutions. 201 .

If a network is internal and does not access the Internet. So the dotted decimal address of our example is 33. Each of these octets represents a number from 0-256. it is not easy for us.967. 2nd octet: The value of the 2nd octet is 39. the administrator may assign an IP address to each computer (as long as the number is unique). It is important that the networking professional have a basic understanding of these classes. Inc. are assigned by the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) and these IP addresses are further divided into classes. This IP address is a 32-bit binary number. 3rd octet: The value of the 3rd octet in our example is 8.00001000.11000010 Each octet represents a number between 0-256: 1st octet: 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------16 8 2 1 128 64 32 4 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------32 16 8 4 2 1 128 64 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Adding the values assigned to the “1” positions gives us a value of 33 for the first octet. 4th octet: And finally the value of our 4th octet is 194.296 (4. let’s now take a look at IP address numbers. Network computers require a unique IP address so that the other computers on the network can identify them and be able to communicate with them. An octet is a group of eight binary digits and a period or “dot” separates these octets.194. . Although that is easy for a computer. A basic knowledge of the binary numbering system is required to understand network addressing: The 32-bit binary number: 00100001001001110000100011000010 Broken down into four octets: 00100001.39. Imagine how difficult it would be to have to remember a combination of 32 1s and 0s for each address.294. A 32-bit binary number can represent (232) or 4.2 billion) different numbers.00100111. The result is called a dotted decimal number. Internet IP addresses. they are broken down into four octets.8. however.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP Addressing IPv4 Enough talk about IP address names. 202 Specialized Solutions. To simplify these addresses.

For the Network+ exam.8.39 would be the Network ID and 8. An example of a Class C IP address would be 193. In this class the first three octets are used for the Network ID and only the last octet is used for the Host ID. The first two octets identify the network (Network ID) and the last two octets identify the host (Host ID). The first octet of a Class C address is always a number between 192-223. The leading bits in the binary representation of a Class C address are always 11 (11000000).39. B and C. The class of the IP address determines which octets identify the Network ID and which octets identify the Host ID. The example we used to define a dotted decimal address of 33. The first octet (33) would identify the network (Network ID) and the rest of the octets would identify the host (Host ID) 39.8.8 and the Host ID would be 194. Within classes. Class C Addresses These are the most common and are used for smaller networks. Depending on the assignment.194 would be the Host ID.39. the first octet on the left is always part of the Network ID and the last octet on the right is always part of the Host ID.) The first octet in a Class A address is always a number between 1 and 126. only the first octet is used for the Network ID and all three remaining octets identify the host (Host ID). The first octet in a Class B address is always a number between 128 and 191.194 where the Network ID would be 193. There are five common classes: A through E.194. (A host may be any device on the network.194. Class B Addresses This class is assigned to medium sized networks.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials IP Addresses The dotted decimal number is further broken down into two components. Class A Class B Class C Class A Addresses If the network applying for Internet IP addresses is extremely large. An example of a Class B IP address would be 129.39. The leading bit in the binary representation of a Class B address is always 1 (10000000). The octet(s) on the left represents the Network ID (Network ID) and the octet(s) on the right represents the Host ID (Host ID).194 would be an example of a Class A address. In this case 129. you should pay special attention the Classes A. 203 . Class D and Class E Addresses Class D cannot be used for networks (multicast) and Class E IP addresses are reserved for future use. the network is divided into classes.8.39. The leading bit in the binary representation of a Class A address is always 0 (00000000). 01-126 128-191 192-223 (leading bit = 0) (leading bit = 1) (leading bits =11) Specialized Solutions.8. The two octets in the center can be either assigned to the Network ID or the Host ID. The class can be determined by the value of the first octet. Inc.

Class B IP addresses are all in use and no longer available. and they are responsible for the assignment and regulation of IP addresses.126 128 .191 192 . B or C address. the Network ID of 127 designates the local node and allows that node to send a test packet to itself without generating network traffic.223 In addition. All in use and no longer available. Some IP Addresses are reserved for special purposes: If: All Zeros All Ones 127 Network ID This Network All Networks Local Node Host ID This Node All Nodes IP Address Default Route for RIP Broadcast It is important for the networking professional to be able to identify whether an IP address is a Class A.0.534 possible Host ID numbers. there are only 65. . Class B . Class C IP addresses are still available. with the least number of Network IDs. there are 16. This organization is called InterNIC (Internet Network Information Center).used for medium-sized networks.214 possible Host ID numbers. (For example. Inc. Class C uses three octets for the Network ID and only one for the Host ID. 204 Specialized Solutions.used by very large networks. there are some IP addresses that are reserved for special purposes: Addresses that begin with 127 and 224 through 255 are used for testing purposes and for multicasting and are not available for normal host addresses. Class C has a large number of Network IDs and only a few Host IDs. This is the loopback address.1) Class A . Likewise. Also. Use the following table to memorize the different classes: CLASS A CLASS B CLASS C 1 . You can see that Class A has the largest number of hosts. so there are only 254 addresses available for hosts. Class B uses two octets for the Network ID and two octets for the Host ID. if a network is going to be connected to the Internet.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Since a Class A Network ID uses the remaining three octets to assign numbers for the Host ID. you must petition the official Internet authorities for the assignment of a network address.used for smaller networks that do not exceed 254 hosts. Class C . As we mentioned earlier. specifically 127.0. Note: The existing shortage of addresses has made it impossible to obtain a Class A address for a long time.777.

This happens to supercede the rule about one zero having to be left in a field. IPv6 uses format prefixes (FP). Unicast is an address for a single host. Here is an example of a Unicast address: 1070:0:0:0:7:777:300F:754B Specialized Solutions. It would make it unclear as to what was represented. 205 . IPv6 uses hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9. as compared to IPv4. VA 22070 You can also E-mail to hostmaster@internic. IPv6 (IP Next Generation) IPv6 (IP Next Generation) is the latest IP technology. For example. Anycast. the following address 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0005 can be represented in their compacted form by :: ::5 You cannot. Inc. A double colon can be used to represent multiple contiguous fields of zeros. An example of IPv6 is as follows: AAAA:BBBB:0000:0000:0000:0081:FFFF:DDDD A shorthand version of the previous IPv6 address: AAAA:BBBB:0:0:0:81:FFFF:DDDD Leading zeros can be taken out. but at least one must be left in each 16-bit field. use the double colon more than once in an IPv6 address. as well as ease of configuration and security built right in. which are variable-length fields that comprise the high-order bits. however.net. then A to F) instead of decimal because of the length of the new addressing scheme. and Multicast. The benefits of IPv6 include improved scalability. It does. The address types are Unicast. Rather than having “classes” like IPv4. It uses 128-bit addressing.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Contact InterNIC at: Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services 505 Huntmar Park Drive Herndon. however. You can compact multiple fields of zero beyond the previous example. which only uses 32-bit addressing. to define the address type. demand high bandwidth. It uses eight 16-bit pieces with colons as separators as opposed to the full stops used in IPv4.

which replaces broadcast. is an address for a group of hosts within a scope and has a FF00::/8 prefix. Inc.0. Multicast. An aggregatable global address uses a fixed prefix of 2000::/3. A Site-local address uses the prefix FEC0::/10 and can be regarded as private addresses.1 with IPv4.0. IPv6 allows for a multitude of IP address possibilities for the future of networking. Link-local address and IPv4-compatible address.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Unicast addresses can be broken down further into four sub-groups: Global aggregatable address. All in all. The Loopback address in IPv6 is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1. Site-local address. since they can be used to limit traffic to a domain. 206 Specialized Solutions. Finally. just like 127. . IPv4-compatible IPv6 addresses have zeros in the section beyond the normal IPv4 32-bit address (0:0:0:0:0:0:A:B:C:D or ::A:B:C:D) Anycast is an address for a set of interfaces that typically belong to different hosts and is delivered to the closest one. Link-Local addresses use the FE80::/10 prefix and are used by hosts on a local link.

255. only the traffic that is not local will pass through.0 Class A (16. Subnet masks with full octets (255) are the default subnet mask.00000000 or 255. all the traffic within a building or campus will be kept locally except when it needs to go to another subnet. you can reduce the overall network traffic.216 hosts) Class B (65.11111111. Inc.0 (Class B). which uses a certain logic to determine the network portion of the address. This is done with binary addition (anding). Anding is the binary addition that the router uses to make this determination.0 255.0 In regard to classful addressing .255.777. 207 . lets look at subnet masks. In this example.0. Before looking at anding. By using a concept called anding. The purpose of a subnet mask is to determine the network portion of the IP address. A subnet mask is an IP address (dotted-decimal number) in which all ones represent the network portion of the IP address and all zeros represent the host portion of the IP address. For example.0. You must however.0 255.00000000. a router can determine which addresses are local and which addresses are for other subnets within the network. have all 1s to the left and all 0s to the right.255.255.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Subnetting Subnetting is the process of creating more than one private network from one public network address by customizing your subnet mask. By using subnets. a subnet mask can be 255.0. Specialized Solutions. the results will be the actual network portion of that IP address (not necessarily the default network portion determined by its class).0 (Class C). For example: 11111111.0. If you “and” the IP address to the subnet mask.0 (Class A).0. or 225.255.255. Default Subnet Masks 255. 255. separating it from the host portion of the address. a large university may have a network spread over several buildings and perhaps remote campuses.534 hosts) Class C (254 hosts) Note: You cannot use IP addresses with all 1s or all 0s. Since a router connects each subnet.0. The number of 0s determines the maximum number of available hosts within the sub-network. You can use a subnet mask that does not completely use all the bits in an octet.255.0.

32. The following tables summarize IP addresses and subnet masks: 208 Specialized Solutions.32.194. Therefore in our example the Network ID is 33. a router can determine if a message is for a destination on the local network or for a machine on a remote segment.194. By using this method.8.0) Noticing that all the places that have ones.39.0) equals 00100001.32 and the Host ID is 7.00000000 (255. Since the subnet mask only goes 3 bits into the second octet. using our previous example of 33.0.11000010 (33.0.194 is determined by the zeros in the subnet mask. and through leaving only the digits for the network portion or 33.00001000.00100111.0. It is common in TCP/IP to omit the trailing octets in the Network ID and the leading octets in the Host ID.00000000 (33.0. let’s and it to the subnet mask of 255.224. for binary addition: 1+1=1 1+0=0 0+0=0 Now. .11100000.8. 00100001.194) 11111111.224. The network and host portions do not break down neatly into octets since the subnet mask does not take up a complete second octet.0.8.00100000.00000000.7.194. while the Host ID 0. Inc.8.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Remember. Those 11 bits equal a network portion of 33.00000000.8. The remaining 21 bits in the IP address is the host portion This equals 7. thus reducing the traffic on the rest of the network.39.32. Any local addresses will not pass through. it recognizes the first 11 bits as the network portion of this address.0.

0 255.b. There are steps to follow when subnetting: Determine the number of Network IDs required.b. There are several reasons to divide a network in this manner.c 128.097.255.0 255.216 65.255. If a router is connected to two subnets.0.0 255.0 Maximum Networks and Hosts per Class Class A B C Default Subnet Mask 255.a.a.0 255.a. Determine the number of Host IDs per subnet. it will require an address for each subnet.384 2. A unique host ID is required for each TCP/IP computer network interface card.c to 191.534 254 How to Subdivide a Network The process of subdividing a network into logical units is called subnetting or subnetworking.0 Number of Networks 126 16. • • • • Connect physically remote local networks.c Default Subnet Mask 255.a.c 192. each TCP/IP printer network interface and each router interface on each subnet.0.152 Number of Hosts 16.255.0. Reduce network traffic by limiting broadcast and local traffic to a single segment.255. A unique network ID is required for each subnet and each wide area network.a.b.c to 126. Allows an unlimited number of hosts to communicate.0.b.c to 223. Connect a mix of network technologies (Ethernet and Token Ring).777.a. Inc.0.255. Specialized Solutions.0. 209 . Be sure to include some room for growth of the network.b.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Default Subnet Mask and Network Classes Class A B C IP Address 001.b.255.

0.224. Class B Subnet Mask (2 to 14 bits borrowed) 255.255. We will use an InterNIC ID of 191.0 255.255.0 255.255.255. we have one network with approximately 65.255.0 255.382 Hosts N/A 8190 4096 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 210 Specialized Solutions.255.255.255.255. Inc. We do this by using bits from the next octet or octets as part of our network addresses that we assign.255.36. you will need to start with the network ID supplied by InterNIC.248 255. With this number. we are increasing the number of network addresses that we can use and decreasing the number of host.255.0.255. First.254.0 255.255. .000 hosts.255.0 255.248.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Define the Subnet Mask The goal is to define one subnet mask for the entire internetwork that gives the desired number of subnets and allows enough hosts per subnet.0 255. To begin this process.128 255.255.255.255. The following table shows the subnet mask created by borrowing bits and how it will affect our network.255.252. As we begin to subnet. we will notice that this is a Class B network and therefore the default subnet mask will be 255.255.255.255.240.252 Bits 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Subnets 0 6 14 30 62 126 254 510 1022 2046 4096 8190 16.240 255.224 255. You should remember the formula 2n-2 where n is the number of bits borrowed.192. We use this formula to determine the number of subnets that will be created by borrowing bits from the hosts.192 255.0 255.

255. giving us a total requirement of 18. 211 .255.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Class C Subnet Mask (2 to 6 bits borrowed) 255.255. Just to be on the safe side. Specialized Solutions.255. 2. the question is how many bits of the third octet do we need to use? After examining our network requirements.255.224 255. you can use the scientific calculator supplied with any Windows operating system. Make sure that it is in scientific view (that’s the big calculator). We already know that the first two octets will be 10111111 00100100 from this ID. we determine that we will need 14 subnets to meet our current needs.255.252 Bits 2 3 4 5 6 Subnets 0 6 14 30 62 Hosts N/A 30 14 6 2 To make this easy.255.192 255. Enter the value of 18.240 255.255. lets keep our network ID of 191. Now we get out our Windows calculator. For this example. Make sure that the decimal mode (Dec) is selected. 3.248 255. Inc.255. 1.255. Change the mode to binary (Bin). let’s add 4 more for future expansions. The number 18 will now be in binary (10010).36 as assigned to us by InterNIC.

we would have had to reconfigure the entire network. The following table shows the six subnets created when using the three bits of the third octet: 212 Specialized Solutions. For this example. This will be the number of bits required for the third octet.255.36. instead of selecting the next subnet on our list. Count the number of binary digits (5).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 4. .255. Had we needed to add a new subnet.0 and the network address of 192. our answer would have been to use 4 bits and we would have been limited to a maximum of 14 subnets.224. you can determine the available Network IDs. This will actually allow us up to 30 subnets with 2. Inc.0. the subnet mask would be 255. To keep things simple.248. Also notice that had we chosen 14 (no allowance for growth). let’s look at the subnets for the subnet mask of 255. Determine the Network IDs One you determine the number of subnets required and the subnet mask.000 hosts each.

000 or .Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Subnets (Subnet Mask 11111111 11111111 111) Binary Network ID 11000000 00100100 11000000 00100100 001 11000000 00100100 010 11000000 00100100 011 11000000 00100100 100 11000000 00100100 101 11000000 00100100 110 Dotted-decimal ID 192. A Class B network default subnet mask would be 255. The only restrictions are that you cannot use . The sending computer checks the octets of the destination address against its own to determine if the destination computer is on the local network or a remote network.0. Inc. indicating that the Network ID is contained in the first two or three octets respectively.36. In dotted-decimal format. or one that is located on a remote network. Summary of Subnets Subnet masks are used on TCP/IP networks to determine whether a message is for a computer that resides on the local network. these are reserved for broadcast addresses.0. This indicates that the Network ID is located in the first octet of the network address. If it is different.255. on a Class A network the default subnet mask would be 255.0.0.0. the sending computer will send the message to a router for delivery. The zeros indicate the location of the Host ID.255.160 192. they are on the same network.128 192.36.36 (overall network address) 192. this means that the number starts with . For example.64 192. up to and including the remaining digits not used with the subnet ID. and continues up to one less than the subnet ID of the next subnet.192 Determine the Host IDs The host ID can be assigned as any number starting with the last digit of the forth octet (00000001).32 192. (If the sending computer and the destination computer have the same subnet mask.255.36. 213 .36.36.96 192.001 in the last octet.0 and the default Class C subnet mask would be 255.) Specialized Solutions.36.255.

223 214 Specialized Solutions.0.0.255.255.0.255. .126 128 . Inc.191 192 .0 255.0 255.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide NETWORK CLASS CLASS A CLASS B CLASS C DEFAULT SUBNET MASK 255.0 CLASS ID 1 .

you will need to type in the specified default gateway. This opens the TCP/IP Properties window and you can now click on the appropriate tab and enter your configuration information. Whichever one appears first on the list is considered the default gateway.” and the computer will capture one from the DHCP server. Default Gateway Type the IP address of the gateway routers you have installed on your network. you may specify a particular IP address. Use the “New” and “Add” command buttons to add a new gateway to the list of installed gateways. and enter the information in the appropriate fields. Inc. Next. in addition to other hardware and software configurations. or click the radio button next to “Obtain an IP address automatically. click the Protocols tab. DNS You can enable or disable DNS.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials TCP/IP Configuration Concepts The Windows Registry database contains the TCP/IP configurations. Specialized Solutions. However. other TCP/IP settings may be established or changed by first clicking on the Network icon in the Control Settings window. The appearance of these dialog boxes may vary depending on which operating system you are using. 215 . On some screens. and click Properties. Click the radio button to enable DNS. Only administrators who have detailed knowledge and experience working with the Registry should attempt to change the default TCP/IP parameters in Registry Editor. IP Address Here. right-click on TCP/IP Protocol.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide WINS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) is central to Microsoft’s networking topology. and subnet mask configuration. 216 Specialized Solutions. . default gateway. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is used on a TCP/IP network to send configuration data to clients. Inc. It also includes the DNS configuration. WINS maps NetBIOS names to IP addresses. This information includes the TCP/IP address configuration.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. 217 . Keyword ARP BOOTP Class A IP Address Class B IP Address Class C IP Address Default Gateway DHCP DNS FTP HOSTS file HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICS IMAP4 IP IP Address LMHOSTS file NAT NetBIOS Octet Definition Specialized Solutions. Inc.

. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword POP3 Port Number Proxy Server SMTP SNMP Subnet Mask Subnetting TCP UDP WINS Definition 218 Specialized Solutions.

Who is responsible for maintaining top-level domains? 8. How many primary protocols are used to make the TCP/IP Suite? 3. What is the value of the leading bit (one on the far left) for a Class A IP address? Class B? Class C? 11. What are the four layers that make up the TCP/IP protocol suite? 2. 10. Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into _________ and ________ groups. Which of the name resolution services will work only in Windows? 9. 12. 4. What are five reasons to use subnetting? Specialized Solutions. Inc. What is a domain? 7. What is an FQDN and give an example? 6. 219 . Name three of the five other protocols used within TCP/IP. What is the purpose of DNS? 5.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Review Questions Chapter 8 1. IPv4 addresses consist of a ______ bit number.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 220 Specialized Solutions. .

The data is then compiled in a database called a MIB (Management Information Base). In addition. It is run on a single computer and is used to access any SNMP devices and collect data. you can obtain several third party software packages that will help you manage a network. the administrator can create reports and charts that define the status of the network. The following are several SNMP managers: Hewlett-Packard Open View IBM NetView InterMapper (Macintosh) MRTG (Multi Router Traffic Grapher – UNIX) NetMinder Sun Net Manager SNMP utilizes three elements for the complete system: The management system software The agent software Communities Management Software This is the primary software package that is used by the administrator. 221 . Using one of these products. Specialized Solutions.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities One of the advantages of using TCP/IP as your network protocol is that it comes with several utilities that you can use to validate and troubleshoot the network.SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an open protocol that allows third party software vendors to create products to manage networks. From the database and the software interface. you can remotely monitor any SNMP compatible device. Inc. Network Managers .

222 Specialized Solutions. It will respond to commands issued by the management software. Inc. therefore providing a level of security. An additional SNMP command is the trap. Set: sends a configuration value to a device. The value of using communities is to limit the number of managers and agents.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Agent Software The agent software resides on the SNMP compliant device. Get-next: request the next value in a sequence. Communities Communities are logical groups consisting of at least one manager and agent (usually several agents are assigned to one manager). Validation Tools TCP/IP provides several command-level tools that can be used to validate various parameters within a network. The three commands are: Get: request data from the device. A community can also restrict access. This command will capture any errors and problems that occur on the agent device and send it to the manager. . These commands can be entered from a DOS prompt.

shows every router interface that a TCP/IP packet passes through on its way to its destination. Netstat -s shows statistics on a per-protocol basis. Netstat -r shows the content of the routing table. Nbtstat -n provides local NetBIOS names. Note in the graphic below that an icon indicates that the event is critical (a stop occurred). serious (!). NBTSTAT This command will display NetBIOS over TCP/IP statistics. ROUTE The ROUTE command will show you the routing table and allow you to make edits to it. and normal (i). and TCP/IP events and errors. TRACERT A Trace Route command-line utility. Nbtstat -R both purges and reloads the remote name cache table. Inc. Nbtstat -r provides names resolved by both broadcast and the WINS service. Netstat -a shows all connections and listening ports. NETSTAT This command will display all the TCP/IP protocol statistics. Specialized Solutions. 223 . This includes critical system errors. Nbtstat -c provides the remote name cache with the IP addresses. Netstat -e shows Ethernet statistics.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities Event Viewer Event Viewer is a Windows utility that will allow you to log any events and errors. but did not cause a stop. TRACERT.

. clicking Run. Inc. 224 Specialized Solutions. and typing in either cmd or command.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Hint: Use these line commands by clicking the Start button in your taskbar.

NSLOOKUP -t shows all records of the type specified. NSLOOKUP a shows aliases of clients in the domain. Ping -t performs a continuous ping and ping -n pings the IP address more than once.168. NSLOOKUP -d shows all records for the domain. Arp -s is used to change the IP address of a device. 225 . and will display the current configuration of a computer. IPCONFIG/WINIPCFG These commands are the same. IFCONFIG IFCONFIG displays the status of the network interface configuration. ARP ARP will allow you to find the physical address (MAC address) of a computer by using the IP address of that computer. which might be 0000-05-67-FF-33. You should use this command when you want to verify a user’s configuration or if there are problems reaching a remote host. For example. Ping works at the IP level. NSLOOKUP -h shows CPU and operating system information for the domain.12. PING The lowest level test to find out if you have connectivity to a remote host. IPCONFIG is entered from a DOS prompt and WINIPCFG can be used from RUN on the START menu. Arp -a displays the current ARP entries (resolved IP to MAC addresses) on your client. and you would use this IP to find its MAC address or its physical address. The following three are the most common and are covered in more detail in the next chapter. and will often respond even when higher-level TCP-based services cannot. NSLOOKUP This command is used to troubleshoot DNS problems and can display the DNS entry for a given IP address.1. RARP RARP accomplishes the reverse of the ARP by using the known MAC address to find a host’s IP address. Specialized Solutions. Inc. the IP of a host might be 192. NSLOOKUP -s lists well-known services of clients in the domain.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS TCP/IP also provides several useful troubleshooting tools.

. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 226 Specialized Solutions.

227 . Inc. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Keyword ARP Event Viewer IFCONFIG IPCONFIG Management Software NBTSTAT NETSTAT NSLOOKUP PING RARP SNMP TRACERT Definition Specialized Solutions.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords.

Inc. In order for your new network management software to monitor the activities of the entire network. 3. each device will need to be _________ compliant. 228 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 9 1. What kind of software package can you purchase to help analyze your network? 2. You are the manager of a large network and have been getting complaints about the system being slow. . List as many as you can. TCP/IP provides several tools that you can use to validate statistics of your network.

from wandering into unprotected areas and inadvertently corrupting or deleting files. Therefore. A disgruntled employee. can deliberately damage your network. anyone can get into any file and do anything to it they want to do. data encryption. Whether the sabotage is malicious. Password practices and procedures.Chapter 10 – Network Security Chapter 10 – Network Security Security is a vital aspect of a network that cannot be ignored. before you set up the network. Once a company’s files have been set up for maximum access. Very few users will have access to administrative features. creating chaos and costing thousands. such as setting up E-mail addresses and initial passwords. Select a basic security model that will meet the needs of your network and customize it as your needs change. or an irresponsible prank. A good plan will include the following considerations: • • • • Size of network Scope of network Type and amount of usage of the network Who will have access to what User-level Security All employees should be assigned user names and passwords. There are a number of reasons for maintaining a secure network. as well as the levels of permission necessary for these individuals to do their jobs. The best time to set up your network security. User and Share Level Users will have different levels of access. Specialized Solutions. or at least have your plan intact. the network administrator has complete responsibility for anything that happens to the network. Although corrupting and deleting files accidentally can cause serious problems. Limiting access via passwords can prevent an inexperienced user. unless safeguards are built in. is right up front. depending on the roles they play in your company. motivated by curiosity. Users should be held accountable for the security of their individual workstations. or anyone who has access to your network for that matter. and firewalls are critical parts of your network. Inc. All users will have access to the network and to their own files (documents they themselves have created). Most network security breaches are the work of someone from inside the company. or even millions. As you might have already deduced. of dollars. the results can be devastating. 229 . you must also be prepared for the possibility of malicious intent. Most users will also be able to access shared files. she must develop a plan that will meet the needs of her particular network.

authentication confirms that messages received truly originated from their stated source. the user will be inclined to be less attentive to personal security. should the administrator be unavailable at a time when administrator access is required. Users can access a shared resource. User Logon Share-level Security With the share-level security model. the file can be accessed by anyone who has the password and knows how to use it to access the shared resource. They can then copy the file to a local drive or a personal folder on the server. Information on the shared drive cannot be changed by anyone other than the person who created the file. It creates an atmosphere of confidentiality. a gesture of respect for the user and the system. If the user is not able to trust that the documents he or she creates are safe from outside access. The systems administrator should have an assistant or backup person who will have total access to the system. A verification method called “authentication” verifies the identity of a person or process. A roadmap of all user names and passwords should be kept in a secure place. while the original file remains intact. among other things. Password protection is. The user can edit the file as necessary. Inc. . where the administrator can easily retrieve it. 230 Specialized Solutions. In a manner similar to the signature on a document. However. passwords are assigned to network resources rather than to users. User-level security requires the user to logon using a Username and password.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Privacy and confidentiality are important to most users. and cultivates a conscientious attitude toward security. such as a template or another type of file.

Inc. 231 .Chapter 10 – Network Security Password Security Specialized Solutions.

Protocol-specific application proxy firewalls may provide increased access control. at the very least. or they can be configured to suit your specific security needs. A firewall will need to be part of your security plan in order to prevent unauthorized access from outside of your network. It is an important part of a network security plan. Firewall Blocking Port Numbers You can block port numbers for security purposes on your firewall or router so as to allow only specific traffic into your network. If you are accessing the Internet from your network. and work at the application level. Files need to be backed up daily. if you wanted to block Internet traffic from entering your intranet. Gateway hosts (also called bastion hosts) create fortified areas in the network’s security perimeter. you would block port 80. they can be host-based. Some firewalls will only allow E-mail to pass through. They can permit or deny traffic at a certain level. by forwarding application traffic through the firewall. you will be responsible for choosing the type of firewall that best meets your network’s needs. 232 Specialized Solutions. For example. or auditing. This needs to be handled in such a way that production will not be interrupted. Firewalls can trace calls and locate the computer trying to break in. Inc. . Firewalls A firewall is designed to prevent access to your network from outside the company. and your company’s files and directories will be safe and available when you need them. As the system administrator. but they are not particularly effective if your goal is to protect trade secrets or other types of proprietary information. Your security needs will determine which techniques will best meet your system’s needs.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Security Techniques There are a number of techniques and practices that will enhance the security of your network. and even more often on larger networks. Backing up Data Another integral part of network security is your backup system. Some will be more suitable to your system than others. you will most likely be using E-mail.

Floppy disk capacities today. There are several options available. Although slower than RAID. Inc. Specialized Solutions. called the backup medium. how the backup information will be tested. so if one goes down the other can maintain network operations. plan to fail. As you might guess. As a computer professional. which uses laser technology to read and write information onto a removable disk that has capacities of 128 MB to 650 MBs.Chapter 10 – Network Security It may make more sense to have two medium-sized servers. your plan will need to include information about who will be in charge of performing the backups. the small-capacity category includes the floppy disk. Remember. In addition. These multiple disks are called disk arrays.44 MB for the standard floppy disk to up to 250 MB capacities for ZIP disks. Another more common form of backup is to a tape drive. While planning your backup strategy. it is still a viable option. offer server equipment with multiple hard drives that mirror each other. and are more commonly known as RAID. the second server should serve as a backup to the first. you must answer important questions about what to backup. Ideally. It also has large capacities of up to 50 GB for some systems. range from 1. where you will keep the backup information (on-site or off-site). This backup medium is suitable for small companies. Backup Options Before we discuss the different RAID fault tolerance strategies. the other can take over without compromising network operations. Large-capacity disks include such options as the removable optical disk. rather than one larger server. so make sure not to neglect this important part of network security. and how often backups will be performed. Nothing will save you time and stress like an effective and thorough backup strategy in case the worst happens and your system crashes. If anything happens to one. let’s discuss the various backup methods that are available. you know how important a backup plan is to the safety of your network’s data. 233 . Most file server manufacturers recognize the need for data redundancy and thus. those who fail to plan. and the procedure to follow for recovery. Tape Backup This is probably the oldest and most popular backup medium in use today. The tape backup method is inexpensive and simple to implement. for performing and storing data backups: Removable Disks There are two categories of removable disks: Small-Capacity and Large-Capacity.

Volumes Volumes are a way to organize storage disks so that the network operating system can store data on a disk. It is a named portion or chunk of disk space. The Differential backup is used for backing up only the files that have changed since the last full backup. 234 Specialized Solutions. A volume can be part of a disk or an entire disk. Inc. Fault Tolerance and RAID The ability of a system or component to continue normal operations. Full. Most operating systems come with a backup utility. will backup all selected data on the network. and utilizes different means of dealing with security issues at this level. despite the presence of hardware or software failures. Differential and Incremental. Differential.. This will reduce the amount of time needed to perform backups to the server. This usually involves some degree of redundancy. as its name implies. as only the data that has changed since the last backup will be copied. To restore. . both the last differential backup tape copy and the last full backup tape copies will need to be used. but usually these won’t have the features available on a third-party backup program. The Full backup. This method will take the largest amount of storage media. and Incremental Backups There are three backup types available: Full.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Back It Up Backup Software Software programs or utilities are available that make backing up data easier and more efficient. This method also uses an archive bit to identify which files have changed. When recovering from a failure. the last full backup and all of the incremental backup tapes will be needed. The Incremental backup is used for daily backups. but will be the easiest to restore. is called fault tolerance. An archive bit is used to identify the files that have changed. This type of backup is usually performed weekly.

Parallel array with ECC (disk striping with ECC) RAID 3 . This technique may be applied in either software or hardware. then the data in the entire array is also lost. including Novell NetWare. If more than one disk is lost. this one uses the parity method of ensuring that the data stored is really the same data that was sent. Several operating systems. support either disk mirroring or disk duplexing.Striped array with rotating parity (disk striping with parity) NOTE: The acronym for RAID has also been referred to as: “Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. (Provides no fault tolerance. the data in the stripe set is lost and cannot be retrieved. 235 . however.Non-redundant striped array (disk striping) RAID 1 .” Disk Striping (RAID 0) The segmentation of logically sequential data. This. so that segments can be written to multiple disk drives (or other physical devices) in a round-robin fashion is called disk striping. However. which provides for even more fault tolerance.Striped array with parity (disk striping with large blocks) RAID 5 . if anything happens to one of the drives.Mirrored arrays (disk mirroring) RAID 2 . Inc.Parallel array with parity (disk striping with ECC stored as parity) RAID 4 . With this method. is not being used commercially at the moment to an Specialized Solutions. a copy of the data is spread across all of the disks based on a mathematical formula such that any one disk in the set can be lost and the other disks will have a copy of all of the information that it contained.Chapter 10 – Network Security The following are common RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) specifications: RAID 0 . Typically.) Disk Mirroring (RAID 1) Disk mirroring or disk duplexing involves using one or more mirrors of a hard disk. such as a single file. this relatively inexpensive technique can be very useful. The same data is written to two separate hard disks in order to preserve the data in the event of a device failure. Disk Striping With Parity (RAID 5) The most common of RAID strategies. and is a standard feature of RAID systems. If your processor is capable of reading or writing data faster than a single disk can keep up. administrators are alerted when one disk fails so that they can “regenerate” the RAID set before another disk has a chance to fail. RAID 6 and Beyond RAID-6 includes a second disk striping with parity scheme.

SANs are channel attached whereas NASs are network attached. A RAID system is the most common example of a centralized SAN. is like RAID-10. . Storage Area Network (SAN) A SAN (Storage Area Network) is a back-end network connecting storage devices (generally by using SCSI). it offers better performance. In this case. 236 Specialized Solutions. and each type provides power for a different length of time. and sags in the power supply. such as battery time remaining. Inc. surges. A SAN can either be centralized or decentralized. A decentralized SAN connects multiple hosts with many storage systems. RAID-53. but at a greater cost. as you might guess. allowing the computer to shut down before complete loss of power. RAID-10 is comprised of an array of stripes (each stripe equals a RAID1 array). but it is treated just like any node on the network and is subject to all the positives and negatives of that identity. Network-Attached Storage Network-attached storage (NAS) is hard disk storage (RAID) like SAN. but uses a striping scheme where each stripe is a RAID-3 array of disks. also called surge suppressors. It is assigned an IP address and it is attached to a LAN. RAID 7 offers a real-time operating system and the functionality of a standalone computer. SAN traditionally have been used for the purposes of archiving data that is needed but infrequently used. and guaranteed to provide power to a computer in the event of interruptions in the incoming electrical power. which allows for better performance. the best tools seem to be the more expensive ones. A centralized SAN generally ties many hosts together into one storage system. Surge Protectors Surge Protectors.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide large degree. since it is not dependent on another computer. is an issue. These types of RAID are not as commonly used and are not as likely to be on the test. It also has a bare-bones OS (microkernel) for processing I/O requests. Cost. There are several tools on the market that will help prevent data loss from power fluctuations. Like RAID-10. are power strips that provide protection from voltage spikes. It functions faster. An Interactive UPS (also called an “intelligent UPS”) connects to the computer's serial port and provides information. The equipment described below is among the best available: UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) A UPS is battery powered. There are different types of UPS devices. Fault Tolerance and Power You need to protect your network from data loss due to power surges and failures.

Policies that spell out password procedures should be given to all users so they will know what is expected of them. no matter who they are. and discourages them from wandering into unauthorized areas. Passwords should be changed more frequently in high-security networks. so why make them available by not cleaning off your electronic desktop when you leave your workspace? Many large companies implement a “clean desk policy. away. There is no reason for anyone other than the user to access the user’s files. and numbers. 237 . The most effective passwords are ones that are the maximum number of characters and use a combination of letters. This is known as a security audit. No one. Evaluate your security policy on a regular basis to ensure that it is up to speed. management must randomly check to make sure that the policy is being applied. If the network administrator needs to use the workstation. This holds users accountable for their actions on the network. but are easy enough that users can remember them. Inc. include characters. symbols. The importance of users logging off and locking their workstations when they are not physically using them cannot be stressed enough. and troubleshoot before the trouble starts. an effective password policy is one in which passwords change on a regular basis. Password security is compromised if a user writes his or her password down where it might be seen by others.” What this means is that if the employees leave their workstations (for any reason) they are required to clean off their desks or workstations and lock documents. numbers and symbols. etc. So. Users working with sensitive information such as budgets. In order for this policy to be effective. should be given the opportunity to look through another person’s desk while they are not there. he or she will know how to accomplish the task. Specialized Solutions. personnel records and other confidential data should change their passwords at least every 30 days. but most networks can get by with changing their passwords every 30 days.Chapter 10 – Network Security Password Practices and Procedures A network administrator may encrypt password information that is automatically sent to the server when users log on to the network. Some “classified” networks require password changes every day.

Encryption is used to scramble passwords on an internal network so that they may not be stolen during logon. It was invented in 1977 by Ron Rivest. and is used extensively for online commerce (e-commerce) and online banking. the Internet is not the most secure of environments. 238 Specialized Solutions. RSA is a public-key cryptosystem for both encryption and authentication. A VPN is a network that uses the Internet to connect remote users to an internal network. It is also used to secure data over VPNs (Virtual Private Networks). can understand the message. Even with encryption. Without encryption the Internet would be a hotbed for high-tech thieves who could tap into it and steal information and credit card numbers. This practice is called cryptography and the system is called a cryptosystem. Encryption converts regular text into ciphertext by combining the original data with one or more “keys” known only to the sender and recipient. This method uses a 56-bit private key. DES (Data Encryption Standard) is the fastest and easiest method of sending an encrypted message. other than the person for whom the message was intended. . Encryption is also used to encrypt E-mail transmissions. These keys are numbers or strings of characters combined with the original text to create an algorithm. Inc. Adi Shamir. The name comes from their first initials. DES was developed by IBM and is now the most commonly used Private Key encryption system used. The recipient’s public key is used by the sender to encrypt the message. and Leonard Adleman. because the sender and receiver use the same key to decrypt the data. and the recipient’s private key is used to decrypt it.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Encryption Data can be encoded at the sender’s end and decoded at the recipient’s end so that no one. The entire security of RSA depends on the difficulty of factoring large prime numbers. RSA (Rivest-Shamir-Adleman) uses both a public key and a private key.

Specialized Solutions. which is used to encrypt data and to decrypt it. With this method of encryption both parties have the same key. it is imperative that all possible disaster scenarios be addressed. There are over 60. and bulletin boards. Skipjack was originally designed to be integrated onto a chip known as a clipper chip. it is not a completely secure encryption method. the message is encrypted using the original sender’s public key. Boot Sector: These replace the master boot record (or boot sector on a floppy). files downloaded from the Internet. As the name implies. Most viruses are written by hackers who are trying to show off. both on location and at backup sites. If the receiver wishes to respond. Since the financial impact on a business can be severe if even down for an hour. 239 . The recipient of the response would then use their private key to decrypt the message. Viruses Viruses are those nasty little programs that can wreak havoc on a computer and its data.000 known viruses.Chapter 10 – Network Security Extra data appended to a message. EES (Escrowed Encryption Standard) is known as skipjack and uses an 80-bit key. software from unknown origins. Many viruses are simple annoyances. The sole purpose of a virus is to replicate and make life miserable for computer users. much less a day. which identifies and authenticates the sender and message data using public-key encryption. The sender encrypts the message using a public key and the receiver decrypts it using a private key. Ensuring the integrity of your network infrastructure to the best of your ability. but they are less secure. Disaster Recovery A disaster recovery plan (DRP) lays out how an organization or business is to deal with disasters. Viruses can be spread by various sources including: shareware. but the use of the 80-bit key makes it much more complex. so as to allow the business or organization to quickly resume their activities. is called a digital signature. Public Key encryption uses the Diffie-Hellman algorithm and is a one-way type of encryption method. It is designed to offset or minimize the effect of a potential disaster on the business or organization. Prevention should also be addressed in the plan. It is similar to DES. There are four basic types of viruses: File Infectors: These attach themselves to executable files and spread to other files when the program is run. but some of them can cause irreparable harm to files. will ensure a much quicker recovery. Inc. PGP (Pretty Good Privacy) is based on Public Key encryption and was developed to encrypt E-mail messages. It should keep the mission-critical functions first and foremost. They will write themselves into memory any time the computer is booted. Symmetric Keys can also be used.

If the computer has a BIOS setting that allows you to disable boot-sector writes. Make sure it is compatible with all of the operating systems that you use. Many viruses are transmitted by floppy disks. Unfortunately while macros are very valuable. With this in mind. but when loaded. many viruses and macroviruses are transmitted over the Internet. 240 Specialized Solutions. Inc. Use extreme caution when you download files. Keep your anti-virus program updated. especially if they come from sources other than a manufacturer’s Web site. they will go to work on the system. just from running a program. It used to be true that you couldn’t get a virus from opening a document. The most secure protection against Internet-distributed viruses is to make sure you have an antivirus program running at all times (or at least when you’re downloading and first running new files). These days. Unfortunately viruses have become a way of life in the computer world. Hundreds of viruses are written each month. (prevents applications from writing to the boot section of the hard disk). Macro Virus: These attach themselves as executable code to documents and run when the document is opened. enable it! This setting must be disabled before installing a new operating system. there are several measures you can take to prevent or at least minimize the damage: Purchase an antivirus program—there are several good ones on the market. Be careful when reading floppies of unknown origin or using your disk on unfamiliar machines. (They can also attach to some kinds of E-mail). . Trust no one when it comes to loading programs on your machine.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Trojan Horses: These appear to be legitimate programs. they mean that when you open a document you are running a program.

Inc. 241 .Chapter 10 – Network Security Specialized Solutions.

Keyword Data Encryption Differential Backup Disaster Recovery Disk Mirroring Disk Striping Firewall Full Backup Incremental Backup NAS Password Security RAID SAN Share Level Security User Level Security Volumes Definition 242 Specialized Solutions. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. .

5. Inc. passwords are assigned to __________. 243 . What purpose does encryption play in your security model? Specialized Solutions. In a share level model. What are the two requirements of user level logon? 2. 3. What are the three common levels of RAID? 6.Chapter 10 – Network Security Review Questions Chapter 10 1. What is the function of a firewall? 4. The acronym RAID stands for __________.

. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 244 Specialized Solutions.

you must be able to quickly and confidently eliminate as many alternatives as possible. This chapter will begin with some basic troubleshooting techniques. Establish the symptoms: Defining a problem is not always as simple as it sounds. After all. the operator doesn’t know what caused the problem. For some technicians troubleshooting comes naturally. and good listening skills. identify the affected area. select the most probable cause. In most cases. not the symptom. Inc. Without a complete understanding of the problem (the entire problem) you can spend a great deal of time working on the symptoms instead of the cause. troubleshooting is more of an art form than a science. implement a solution. not when all is well. This added frustration often leads to confusion and stress. Remember. establish what has changed. The eight parts are as follows: establish the symptoms. Let’s take a look at an eight-part approach that will lead to successful troubleshooting. In order to do this. For those who must endure the struggle. test the result. Don’t assume that just because you are the expert. a habit of applying a methodical and determined approach will soon result in it becoming second nature for you. If fact. The majority of this course has focused on the facts and science of networks. computers never fail at a convenient time. Be sure to listen carefully to your client or co-worker.Conclusion Chapter 11 – Troubleshooting a Network Being a computer and network professional automatically implies that you are a troubleshooter. while for others it is a struggle. if you are the expert. troubleshooting comprises perhaps the single largest aspect of working with computer and network hardware and software. Being an effective troubleshooter does not come automatically with networking knowledge (even though it is implied). This chapter will focus on the application of these facts to solve problems. Troubleshooting is an art and can be learned. The user of the computer or network is your best source of information. Remember. a pen (or pencil). To make matters worse. but they often hold the keys to the problem. Basic Troubleshooting As mentioned. They may not know the technical reason for the failure. 245 . What you must learn is how to approach a problem in an organized and methodical manner. you are looking for the cause. you must be organized. or when there is a deadline and the user must have it fixed now. The only tools required for this phase are a pad of paper. and progress with some specific tools that you can employ to simplify the process. The first step is the most critical and often the most ignored. It is proper use of all the parts that will make your next troubleshooting exercise easier. “as reported. As a troubleshooter.” is really just the symptom and not the true cause. Specialized Solutions. it seems well defined by the person who calls and complains! But is it really defined? Frequently the problem. you will most likely be called when there is a problem. recognize the potential effects of the solution and document the solution. They always fail in the middle of a job. so that you can focus on the things that might be the cause of the problem.

screen changes. Do not make the questions too technical. you have isolated the problem to the keyboard or its cabling. If possible. Sometimes. but the operator was there before (and after) the problem started and may recall the events that led up to the failure. if a keyboard is not working and you connect a known good keyboard to the computer and it works. These never seem to occur when you are present. This will take time and patience. it is important to observe how it is created. Are you the only one having the problem? Did anyone else use this computer? The list of questions could go on forever. or help them focus on what was going on when the problem first occurred. The only way to resolve these is to be able to re-create the set of circumstances that caused the failure. network or computer moved. you will be able to identify the best questions for the situation.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide you may know how the computer and network runs and can find the technical cause of the failure. Be sure to observe the failure yourself. . You may. There is no particular approach to follow and there is no substitute for experience. and when. as well as the results. Inc. For example. The best you can do is to eliminate any obvious problem and work toward the more complex. One thing that might 246 Specialized Solutions. and so forth). With a little experience. the process of elimination is all that you can do. Isolating the problem is the art of eliminating what you know from what you don’t know. however. Identify the affected area The next step involves the process of isolating the problem.) Show me how to create the error. Describe any changes in the computer (noise. Establish what has changed The most difficult problems to isolate are the intermittent ones. do not intimidate the user. You will need to create your own list based on the situation. recent software upgrade. The user will need to keep detailed records of what is being done before. The purpose is to narrow the search down to one or two general categories. have someone demonstrate the failure to you. the failure occurs. If it is an operatorinduced problem. lights. and most importantly. have to ask some specific questions to jog their memory. You may want to create a form with these questions (and others specific to the situation) for taking notes: When did you first notice the problem? What has changed since the computer was last used? (New Software. Ask a few questions to help identify the problem and list the events as they occurred before the failure.

then you need to further isolate the problem to determine which program is experiencing difficulty. In the case of a network problem. but you cannot receive any E-mail. Start with the most obvious or easiest solution to eliminate. That way the “evidence” is not disturbed. Be sure to refer to any assumptions you may have made. make a plan and follow it. Select the most probable cause Make a Plan and Follow it from Beginning to End Create a planned approach to isolate the problem based on your knowledge at this point. Starting from the top. you can “see” other computers in the network neighborhood. Once a plan is created. Jumping around and randomly trying things can often lead to more serious problems. write them down. the first step in isolation is to separate a network (hardware) problem from a workstation problem. Isolation of a problem requires a structured approach. but something must be wrong in the E-mail software or configuration. create a new plan based on what you discovered with the previous plan. isolate the problem to: A WAN or LAN A segment of a LAN A workgroup or domain A server or workstation A workstation or user Specialized Solutions. Write down your plan! The first step of any plan should be document and back up. Inc. and move forward. The general procedure for isolating network problems is to start globally and work to locally. is the problem occurring on more than one workstation or is it only on one? If you determine that the problem is only on one workstation and the cabling and network card are working properly. 247 . It requires two simple steps. Do not make any assumptions. but to call you.Conclusion help in such cases is to tell the user to not do anything with the computer when the problem recurs. then you know for sure that the network is physically working. it is important to follow it through. You may have to refer back to them later. If for example. If you must make any assumptions. If the first plan is not successful (it won’t always be). Document every action and its results. For example.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Once the search has been narrowed. Here are a few suggestions for isolating the hardware/software from the operator: Have another operator perform the same task on their own workstation. Frustrated and confused operators can lead to further problems. For example. Implement the solution. you must be careful as to how you resolve the problem while not alienating the operator. the problem may be caused by the operator. 248 Specialized Solutions. Inc. In these situations. and not the hardware or the system. This means to have the operator duplicate the problem while you watch – do not tell them how. you must do three things: Formulate a correction (write down what you think will resolve the problem). This will keep you removed from the problem and eliminate the “it always works for the expert” syndrome. be sure to record the “before” and “after” changes. Note: If the problem is software-oriented. With hardware. no amount of training or instruction will solve a problem until that general fear is removed. either repair or replace the defect. . However. It is important to use another operator. Resolving operator-induced failures is more difficult than hardware induced failures. it may require some additional effort. if an operator is afraid of computers in general. Confirm that the operator is using standard operating procedures. as well as the one that is causing problems. Test the correction (make sure that the changes work). if the problem is software or configuration related. In these cases. repair or replacement is usually all that is needed. To resolve these types of problems. you must be very careful to treat the cause and not the symptoms. start looking for specific hardware: Routers Hubs/Concentrator Cabling or Connections Adapters Software related problems could also be isolated to several causes: Protocols Authentications As often as not. Implement a solution After locating or at least narrowing the problem to a few possibilities.

Test the Result No repair is complete without confirmation that the job is done. The reality is that the time you spend after the repair can save repeat service calls and shorten the time-cycle for future service calls. Inc. document the problem and the repair. there is no substitute for experience. maintain. In troubleshooting. This is one way to build.Conclusion Now we want to separate the true professional from the amateur. You have not done a professional job if the repair was completed at the expense of something else. Specialized Solutions. the problem. Confirmation means to make sure that the problem no longer exists. and the repair. The basis for this policy is that once the system is running. you are wasting your time and should be working on the next problem. 249 . Confirming the repair may include some form of feedback from the user. or a follow up call just to make sure all is well. Confirmation of the repair can save you a return trip to repeat the fix or to correct a problem that you created. Document the solution Finally. Many troubleshooting and repair services operate on the fix and run principle. You must look at every new problem as an opportunity to expand that experience. This means to document (in writing) the symptoms. and share experience. Recognize the potential effects of the solution Make sure that the fix did not create other problems. Keeping a copy of the repair procedure in your technical library may come in handy in a year or two when the problem (or one like it) happens again. Ask the user to test the solution and confirm satisfaction.

a network troubleshooter will need a few tools to make the process of troubleshooting easier.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Networking and Troubleshooting Tools Just like a good computer repair technician. Inc. The narrow nose with its serrated jaws is used for pulling or coiling wire. Punch Down Tool 250 Specialized Solutions. Wire Crimper The wire crimper is a versatile tool that strips and cuts copper wire as well as crimping solderless terminals. . Networking tools can be divided into two categories: hardware tools and software tools. They secure the connection between the wires and the block. Wire Crimper Punch Down Tool Punch down tools are used to “punch down” cabling to “blocks” in your wiring rack. Hardware Networking Tools Before we get into the tools that are designed specifically to troubleshoot and ensure the integrity of your network. let us quickly cover some tools used to setup the network cabling.

You can test for AC and DC voltage. All you need to do is use the resistance setting and test the device. When working with network cabling. The purpose of continuity testing is to confirm a complete electrical circuit. A bad cable will be either open or shorted. which is one of the most basic tools for electronic troubleshooting. If the wire is broken. With it you can test various electronic components. If the test is negative (no light or noise). The Multimeter The name multimeter was derived from its ability to measure several different parameters. which will indicate a complete circuit by either a light or a sound. If your meter does not have a continuity setting. An open conductor means that the cable is broken and the current will not flow from one end to the other.Conclusion Hardware Troubleshooting Tools Hardware troubleshooting tools are used to confirm the integrity of the cabling. and continuity. Some meters will let you test for current as well. They can check for continuity and how the pin outs line up. The red wire is the positive probe and the black wire is the negative or ground probe. whether it be RJ-11 or RJ-45. the circuit is broken. Inc. a positive test (the light comes on or it makes a noise) means that the circuit is complete. it is to check to see that a wire is not broken. When you connect both leads of the meter to each end of the device you are testing. In a wire for example. and a switch for adjusting the range of settings to be measured. For example. we will have to know how to test for continuity. you can have only one of two problems. Most will consist of a digital or analog meter or display. but only low amounts (less than 10 amps). the resistance reading for continuity would be zero – meaning that current is flowing without resistance. the resistance reading will be infinity or maximum – meaning that no current is flowing. Network cabling is. Most multimeters have a “continuity” setting. Media Tester Media testers are usually devices used to test the cabling. as well as the electrical power in the computer. Specialized Solutions. A good cable will provide continuity or current flow from one end to the other. it is still possible to test for continuity. We will start by looking at a multimeter. These devices are generally used when you make your own cabling. These failures are like a water pipe that is broken (open) or has a leak (shorted). resistance. A shorted conductor means that the current is flowing to ground or another cable instead of being isolated. There are several tools we can use to check for open and shorted wires. 251 . a pair of wires with probes (one black and one red). Since it is made up of wires. in principle. very easy to troubleshoot.

and test at the other end. You can use a pair of wires (very common in network cables) and connect the two wires at one end.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Tester Tone Generator and Tone Locator A multimeter is a universal tool and almost any electrical or electronic technician should have one. The tone locator is a receiver that is set to the frequency of the generator. If both ends are in the same location. these tools are often called a fox and a hound. This applies a signal on the wires. The problem when using this tool for testing continuity of a network cable is the length of the cable. several pairs of wires at one end (the hub or patch panel). if the cable is a hundred feet long and spans the length of a building. to find pairs of wires in a bundle. Telephone and phone wiring companies use two tools. The question then becomes which pair goes to which room? Solving these problems with continuity testing can take a long time unless you are just lucky. thus locating the wires. there are more often than not. . this is not a problem. The tone generator is connected to the wires at the known location (the room with the outlet). When used together. When the receiver is placed in close proximity to the wire that has the signal applied. called tone generators and tone locators. Inc. 252 Specialized Solutions. However. it will emit a tone. testing for continuity will require an additional wire. However.

It is a single-ended cable that connects to a network card. Time Domain Reflectometer For those who are serious network troubleshooters. These cables can be used to connect two computers into a single network eliminating any other network hardware. but is double-ended. Inc. also called packet sniffers. 253 . By calculating the time it takes a signal to travel the length of a cable and to be reflected back. They will monitor network traffic. are usually a PC with a special network card. Software analyzers. you will know that the network card and the protocol stack are functioning. because they look just like patch cables but are not interchangeable. The Time-Domain Reflectometer (TDR) is used to find breaks and shorts in network cabling. the location of any break or short can be determined. Be careful when using a crossover cable. Two such cables are the hardware loopback and the crossover cable. Any signal placed on the transmit wire will loopback to the receive wire. Specialized Solutions. Protocol Analyzer A protocol analyzer is used to monitor and analyze network traffic.Conclusion Tone Generator Test Cables One method of isolating problems is to use a special cable to remove a workstation from a network and simulate that it is still connected. Many protocol analyzers will include a TDR as one of their functions. there are advanced tools that may well be worth the time and investment. A loopback cable is just what the name implies. and therefore back to the network card. It has the transmit and receive wires connected. The transmit wire on one connector is connected to the receive wire on the other (and vice versa). A crossover cable is similar to a loopback. capture packets and generate reports. If you are able to send a signal and have it return.

254 Specialized Solutions. . OTDRs also calculate the locations of breaks by the amount of time it takes for a signal to travel the length of the cable and back. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Optical Tester Optical Testers or optical time domain reflectometers (OTDR) are essentially the same as a TDR. but used for fiber optic cabling.

You can’t access a resource unless the administrator of the network has allowed you to do so. This is sometimes called a broadcast storm. Reduced bandwidth is just like a traffic jam. Inc. the network. A bottleneck is any resource that limits the rate at which network traffic can be moved.Conclusion Maintaining and Troubleshooting Networks Maintaining and troubleshooting networks differs from operating system to operating system. you will need to refer to the operating systems’ manuals for detailed troubleshooting procedures. Therefore. but can be caused by a disconnected cable. For some reason. and a stuck caps-lock key can cause errors. Authentication Probable Cause Usually these are authentication errors. Common mode failures are generated when one component of a LAN causes the entire LAN to fail. 255 . A common failure is for a user to be unable to logon. Some passwords are case-sensitive. Common Mode Failures Loss of Data Network Security Violations (Insufficient Rights or Permissions) Reduced Bandwidth Specialized Solutions. Anything that breaks the integrity of the data on a network is a break of security. It could be the processor. The following table provides some generic troubleshooting concepts: Network Troubleshooting Situation A single workstation does not connect to the network. the traffic is not moving. due to either excessive traffic or a bottleneck. An example would be a network card that begins to continually broadcast useless information and overloads the network. check to ensure all network cabling and connectors are intact. Often these are caused by typos when entering user names and passwords. If data transfers are incomplete or inaccurate. or a disk resource.

You must manage software distribution to ensure users are not loading non-licensed software and computer viruses onto the network drives. These problems can be addressed by segmenting the network and scheduling non-critical work for after hours. Traffic Overloads Unauthorized Software 256 Specialized Solutions. deletes. If slow loading persists even after defragmenting.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Slow Loading of Programs and Files Fragmentation occurs when the operating system saves. You must defragment the drive. and moves information. check for memory bottlenecks. tasks like backing up drives or moving large amounts of data can be done at night. When the amount of traffic exceeds the ability of the network to carry it. . As networks grow. For example. so does the traffic. the network slows down. Inc.

Conclusion Troubleshooting Scenarios The following summarizes some possible scenarios that you may encounter and how to provide a solution: Misbehaving Protocols You have just installed a new workstation and are unable to see any other workstations or servers on the network. 257 .0. If you are using TCP/IP. Remember this address. This command will give the same results as IPCONFIG from DOS. PING. open the TCP/IP Control Panel to use these utilities.1. Inc. you will use it often. you can confirm your hardware and protocols by using the IPCONFIG. PING the Loopback Address The next step is to use IPCONFIG to get details about your workstation. The first step is to PING the loopback address. but looks better and includes the MAC address of the network adapter card. These commands work from a command prompt. you can use the WINIPCFG command from the RUN dialog box in the START menu.0. On a Macintosh system. On a Windows 95/98 computer. It also lets you know the time that it takes. because as a network professional. Specialized Solutions. This will test the protocol stack in the computer. The loopback address is 127. This comes in handy if you need to see where exactly on your intranet or on the Internet your packet is going. and TRACERT commands to test the network. TRACERT allows you to trace the “hops’ (routers encountered) that a packet takes to its destination.

WINIPCFG You can now PING that address to determine if the network card and protocol stack for the computer are working properly. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Notice that the IP address of this computer is 195. XP. your dialog box will look like the following.55. This command is only for Windows 9x and ME and will not work on a Windows NT.6. 2000.48. or 2003 system. If you are using Windows. 258 Specialized Solutions. . WINIPCFG.

you receive a message like the following.48. then there is a problem with the protocol.6 Continue the process by PINGing another workstation. Inc. If at any stage. 259 . Cable Problems Cabling problems are simple: either they work or they don’t. Here are some suggestions when you suspect cable problems: Specialized Solutions. use the ipxping command. they must be okay. the server. Poor connections and loose connectors cause most cable problems. For the IPX/SPX networks. you will be testing a larger portion of the network. and so on. The biggest problem with them is that we often assume that since they worked yesterday. you have encountered a problem. or the computer you are PINGing is not using the TCP/IP protocol. With each step. It could simply mean that it is not logged on to the network.55.Conclusion PING 195. PING Found a Problem If you are unable to reach a host computer. Usually this means you have the wrong IP address.

If there is a sudden change in performance. or hosts. the first thing to do is find out what has changed. These lights can be seen from the back of the computer. The difference between HOSTS and LMHOSTS is that HOSTS is used in place of DNS and LMHOSTS is used in place of WINS. The actual function of each light will depend on the manufacturer and you may have to check the documentation that came with the card for details. One is the IP address number.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Any time a computer was moved and it suddenly stops responding to the network. You know that the IP connection is good because you can PING the IP address. These are text files that are used to statically map local and remote hostnames and NetBIOS names to IP addresses. respectively.” With nslookup. Beyond that. In general. we learned that workstations. Any new hardware or applications (including upgrades) are always good candidates for the problem. Another place to look for name resolution problems (on a local LAN) is in the HOSTS and LMHOSTS files. they will indicate whether or not the card can detect the presence of a network and when data is being transmitted. Inc. Earlier. Somewhere in the system is a table or database that provides the translations from number to name and vise versa. Performance You think that your network is performing without problems. . have two names. you can find them on the host in the systemroot\system32\driver directory. Check the indicator lights on the adapter card. How do you determine the problem? One network problem encountered is name resolution. (which the computers like) and the other is the IP address name (which we humans like). If no lights are on. you can connect directly to the DNS and access the information stored there. they will let you know if the card is working and if it can access the network. To resolve this problem. while green lights indicate that all is well. If present. you will need to use a TCP/IP utility called “nslookup. Replace any suspect drop or patch cables with a known good one. If these files are being used. but are starting to get complaints that “the network is slow. Name Resolution You are testing a new workstation and are unable to see the workstation by its domain name. suspect a loose or disconnected cable. That location is the DNS (Domain Name Server). NIC Indicator Lights Many network cards have from one to three LED lights (green or yellow) next to the cable connector.” What are you going to do? These problems are often difficult to resolve because there are a vast number of possibilities as to the cause. you can be sure that the network is not being detected. we need to look at four limiting factors on performance. 260 Specialized Solutions.

it will affect the entire network. This may require the requestor to continue to resend its request. For example. Latency Small delays in packet movement that are caused by devices is called latency. Specialized Solutions. everything slows down. are negligible. Think of the bandwidth as the number of lanes on the highway (the more lanes. The bandwidth is the number of packets that can move past a point at any given time (also measured in Mbps). is the throughput and is measured in Mbps (Megabits per second). 261 . and average time to print the document. Server/Workstation Limits Nothing will slow down a network more than a sluggish server. you can print the same document at different times throughout the day and record the time it takes to print. Inc. adding to the network load. slow. Reading and writing from a disk is much slower than from memory. if you are experiencing slow printing. This can slow down data transfer. Just like our highway. Then. at a later date. A server with a memory deficiency will have to write information to a disk cache. Resolving performance problems can be easy. Latency delays. A server that is operating its CPU at 100% will have to delay processing of each request until it completes its current request. but are interrelated. The answer lies in creating a performance baseline. The speed limit. you will need to run a series of tests and record the performance. An application will have to be designed to take advantage of burst mode in order to use it. To create a baseline. or maximum speed that traffic can move. it can send data at a faster than rated speed. the more packets that can be moved). after you identify the problem. For example.Conclusion Bandwidth and Throughput Bandwidth and throughput are not the same thing. but can be measured and will affect performance in large networks. Routers and switches that connect any two segments of a network can cause these delays. if the traffic gets too congested. From this information. The performance of a network will only be as fast as the slowest link in the entire system. if any one component is performing poorly. The trick is knowing how the network performed when it was good and how it performs now. you will know the high. for the most part. You can think of a network as a super highway and the vehicles as being packets of information. some network operating systems will allow for burst mode operation. Therefore. A baseline is simply a record of performance criteria at a given time. you can re-test the printer performance under the same conditions and determine if things have changed. This means that for a small amount of time. Application Efficiency Any application that was not designed to work over a network will be unable to take full advantage of network protocols.

Similar software packages (usually as part of a network analyzer) will collect data for packets/sec. etc. available memory. Network statistics will come from two sources – the server and the network. you will need to use some software called performance monitor for the server or network statistics software for the network itself. etc. . you can monitor and collect data for a variety of events. Inc. With this tool.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The key to monitoring network performance is statistics. Windows Performance Monitor 262 Specialized Solutions. To collect these statistics. With this activated. percent of network utilization. you will be able to monitor such events as processor time. Windows has a built in performance monitor as part of its administrative tools.

Conclusion KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Keyword Bandwidth IPCONFIG Latency Media Tester Multimeter Performance Monitor PING Punch Down Tool TDR Throughput Tone Generator Tone Locator WINIPCFG Wire Crimper Definition Specialized Solutions. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. 263 . Inc.

What are the three primary steps to take when troubleshooting? 2. What utility can you use to confirm that the protocol stack is good? 6. What is the easiest way to tell if the network card can “see” the network? 9. . You have found the cabinet with the patch panel and hub. What is the difference between bandwidth and throughput? 10. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 11 1. What utility can you use to determine the performance of the server? Conclusion 264 Specialized Solutions. You need to know the IP address of a workstation. What is the loopback IP address? 7. and think it might be shorted. What tool would you need to find the short? 5. You have just connected a workstation to the network. but need to know which of the 50 cables goes to the accounting office. What TCP/IP utility can you use to find the IP address of the workstation? 8. What would be the best tool to help you locate the cable in question? 4. You are troubleshooting a cable problem. are you finished with the troubleshooting process? 3. You are working with a TCP/IP network and want to confirm the protocol stack in a specific workstation. You have located the cable in question #3. You have a Windows 2000 network and received complaints that the server is running slowly. After repairing a problem.

Thank you for allowing us to be your training partner and please let us know if we can help with any of your future training needs. Specialized Solutions. so if you have any questions. be sure to review any areas that need improvement. at Specialized Solutions. The following “Appendix A” is an excellent source of review material. We hope that you have enjoyed your Network+ training journey as much as we have enjoyed providing it to you. start taking the practice exams that are on the CD-ROM that was included with this course. Remember. We love to hear from our students. and as often. you are ready to sit for your certification exam. or if you just want to let us know how you are doing. we’d be happy to hear from you! Remember. the best thing about a self-study course is that you are able to review it as much. After taking a practice exam. be sure to refer back to the beginning of this book for tips on what to expect at the exam site. our success is directly tied to the success that our students have with our training and certification products. To measure your retention of these materials. as you like. Inc. When you are consistently achieving scores in the 90% range. and don’t forget to use the Glossary. When you are ready to schedule your exam. 265 .Conclusion This concludes our Network+ Training & Test Preparation guide.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 266 Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

Inc. Using the wrong cable will cause poor performance and/or failure of the network. It is expressed in ohms.Appendix A – Tech Summary Appendix A – Tech Summary The following tables summarize key information found in this course: 5-4-3 Rule When installing coaxial Ethernet cabling. you must conform to the 5-4-3 rule. Coaxial Cable Types Not all coaxial cables are the same. They are specified based on their impedance. • • • Maximum of 5 segments in a series. 267 . In order for the network to operate at peak performance. Impedance is a unit of measurement for resistance to AC voltages. Uses 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base2 Thinnet Cable TV ARCnet Type RG-8 RG-11 RG-58 RG-59 RG-62 Impedance – Ohms 50 50 50 75 93 Specialized Solutions. all electronic components must operate at the same impedance. Maximum of 4 repeaters. Only 3 segments can contain nodes.

RG-62 Ethernet Cabling Cable Type Topology Max. Description Stranded wire core. such as cable television. Repeaters Max Segments with Nodes 3 10Base5 Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Bus 500 10 100 5 4 10Base2 Bus 185 10 30 5 4 3 268 Specialized Solutions. Length (meters) Speed Mbps Nodes Per Segment Max Segments Max. but also used for broadband transmissions. ArcNet networks.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Cable RG-58 /U RG-58 A/U RG-58 C/U RG-59 RG-6 Solid copper core. . Military specification of RG-58 A/U. Inc. Larger in diameter and rated for higher frequencies than RG-59. Broadband transmission.

Four twisted pairs with 4 twists per inch. Cannot be used for 16 Mbps Token Ring. Same as type 1. Inc. Lower cost alternative to type 1 or 2. Contains a shield for use under carpets. Not Defined Two 62. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . Type 1 2 Wire Specs Two STP solid core 22 AWG wires – maximum length 101 meters (331 feet). Specialized Solutions. Voice-grade cable. two STP and four UTP – maximum length 100 meters (328 feet). Four twisted pairs with 5 twists per inch. Two STP – 26 AWG wire. IBM Cable Types (Token Ring) IBM has created its own standards for their Token Ring Networks. but adds voice capability along with data. Uses Voice ONLY 10 Mbps Data grade up to 16 Mbps. Four twisted pairs with three twists per inch. Six twisted pairs.Appendix A – Tech Summary UTP Cable Categories Category 1&2 3 4 5 Wire Specs Suitable only below 4 Mbps. Uses Connect between terminals and distribution boxes or between different wiring closets.5/125-micron multi-mode fibers. Four UTP with two twists per inch – 22 or 24 AWG wire –maximum cable length is 45 meters (148 feet). Plenum grade. Not Defined Two STP – 26 AWG. 269 Fiber Optic Data patch cables. Two STP –26 AWG wire. Data grade up to 100 Mbps.

Inc.4 802.3 802.x Standards The IEEE 802 standards work in the Physical and Data Link layers of the OSI Model.12 Basis of Standard Internetworking Logical Link Control Sub Layer CSMA/CD Ethernet Token Bus LAN Token Ring LAN Metropolitan Area Networks (MAN) Broadband Technologies Fiber Optic Technologies Hybrid Voice/Data Networks Network Security Wireless Networks High Speed LANs 270 Specialized Solutions.x Standard 802.6 802. .1 802.11 802. 802.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE 802. They also divide the Data Link Layer into two sub-layers: Logical Link Control and Media Access Controls.5 802.10 802.9 802.8 802.7 802.2 802.

No Usually No Yes Yes Yes If no math coprocessor No Usually Specialized Solutions.Appendix A – Tech Summary IRQ Assignments IRQ assignments can vary from computer to computer. 271 . however. COM3 LPT2 Floppy Controller LPT1 Real-time Clock Available SCSI/available Available Math Coprocessor Primary IDE Secondary IDE Available for Change No No Yes Usually Usually Usually-Often used for NICs. COM4 COM1. there are some that are always the same and some that can be changed. The following is a standard configuration for IRQ settings: IRQ 0 1 2/9 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function System Timer Keyboard Controller Available COM2. Inc.

The following are common address assignments: 200 to 20F – Game Port 210 to 21F 220 to22F 230 to 23F – Bus Mouse 240 to 24F 260 to 26F 270 to 27F . .LPT2 380 to 38F 390 to 39F 272 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide In addition to IRQs you may have to set the Base I/O address. Inc.LPT3 280 to 28F 290 to 29F 2A0 to 2AF 2B0 to 2BF 2C0 to 2CF 2D0 to 2DF 2E0 to 2EF – COM2 300 to 30F – Network Adapter Card 310 to 31F – Network Adapter Card 320 to 32F – Hard Disk Controller (For PS/2 Model 30) 330 to 33F 340 to 34F 350 to 35F 360 to 36F 370 to 37F .

Inc. 273 .Appendix A – Tech Summary 3A0 to 3AF 3B0 to 3BF – LPT1 3C0 to 3CF – EGA/VGA 3D0 to 3DF – CGA/MCGA (also EGA/VGA in color video Modes) 3E0 to 3EF 3F0 to 3FF – Floppy Disk Controller OSI Model Specialized Solutions.

255.255.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide OSI Model and Connectivity Devices: Layer Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Name Application Presentation Gateways Session Transport Network Data Link Physical Routers Brouter Bridges Switches NICs.0 255.0. Subnet masks are assigned according to the following three classes: Class A B C IP Address 001.214 65. Inc.x 128. Hubs.x.0.x to 223.x.x.x to 126.x 192.0 255. .x to 191.x.x. x.x.0 Number of Networks 126 16.x.x.x Default Subnet Mask 255. Repeaters Computers Devices Subnet Masking Subnet masks are used to divide an IP address into its network address and host address.097. x.x.534 254 274 Specialized Solutions.777.152 Number of Host 16.255.0.x.384 2.

Appendix A – Tech Summary TCP/IP Ports A port is a virtual outlet that can be opened on a network device. Use the loopback address (127.0. Sends a test packet to a specified address. Used to see the entries in the Address Resolution table (uses IP addresses to find MAC addresses). the subnet address. If all is well.1) to test the IP architecture and configuration. and default gateway. PING ARP RARP Specialized Solutions. the subnet mask. it will return. 275 . Displays the basic local host configuration – IP address. Here are some command-line utilities: IFCONFIG IPCONFIG Shows the Linux user’s network interface configuration.0. Inc. Common ports are as follows: Service FTP TELNET SMTP HTTP POP3 Port 21 23 25 80 110 TCP/IP Utilities TCP/IP provides many tools for troubleshooting networks. Uses a MAC address to find an IP address.

. Used to check the status of current IP connections. ROUTE ADD to add entries and ROUTE DELETE to remove entries. In a star topology. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide ROUTE Used to see the local routing table and to add entries to it. Used to check the resolution of NetBIOS names to TCP/IP addresses. (Pronounced Trace Route. NBSTAT NETSTAT TRACERT NSLOOKUP Topology Review In a bus topology. Use ROUTE PRINT to display contents. 276 Specialized Solutions.) Used to verify entries on a DNS server. Used to verify the route to a remote host. all computers are connected to a hub. all computers are connected in a series.

In a mesh topology. Specialized Solutions. all computers are connected to each other. 277 .Appendix A – Tech Summary In a ring topology. Inc. all computers are logically connected in a circle.

. Protocol Analyzer 278 Specialized Solutions. Can also be used for precise voltage measurements. An electronic device that graphically displays frequency and magnitude of analog signals. Also called a network analyzer. Used to capture packets on a network and analyze them. resistance. Used with TDR to locate cable breaks. and continuity of electronic devices and circuitry. TDR – checks and locates breaks in cables.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Transmission Media Media UTP STP Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Fiber Optic Infrared Bandwidth (Mbps) 4-100 16-155 10 10 2000 1-10 Nodes/Segment 1 Varies 100 30 1 NA Maximum Nodes per Network 1024 260 300 90 1024 Varies Maximum Cable Length (meters) 100 100 500 185 2000 32 Troubleshooting Tools Hardware Volt/Ohm Meter Cable Tester Oscilloscope Uses Used to test voltages. Inc.

Inc. Event Viewer SNMP Specialized Solutions. Displays or prints a list of events. Simple Network Management Protocol – used to monitor network devices (servers. Used to provide information for network baselines. 279 .Appendix A – Tech Summary Software Performance Monitor Uses Use to monitor and graphically display various performance parameters found on workstations. servers. interface cards. and networks. hubs. routers. and bridges).

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 280 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

microsoft.novell.com Other Helpful Sites http://www.com Novell http://www.com Specialized Solutions.cnet. Inc. 281 .Appendix B – Useful Web Sites Appendix B – Useful Web Sites Microsoft: http://www.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 282 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

Specialized Solutions. 283 . Perhaps the most famous standards are the “V” standards for modems and Faxes. ANSI This is one of the most common standards in the computing industry. Perhaps the most well known standard is the RS-232 standard for serial communication via DB-9 and DB-25 connector. Inc. CCITT The CCITT (Comité Consultatif Internationale de Télégraphie et Téléphonie) is an international organization also known as the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.Appendix C – Network Standards Organizations Appendix C – Network Standards Organizations The networking industry is full of standards and committees making new standards. In the computing industry. EIA The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) is a group of American manufacturers of electronic equipment. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) is an organization of industry and business groups who develop trade and communication standards. ANSI also is the United States representative on several international organizations like ISO and CCITT (see below). For additional information. This is a common code for basic characters and numbers. As its name implies. it is perhaps best known for the development of the ASCII character set. let alone the networking industry. It is prominent in developing standards for the interface between data processing equipment and communication equipment. search for these organizations on the Internet. This appendix will summarize several of the important standards used in the network industry. it is responsible for establishing standards for communication.

A major ISO contribution to the network community was the development of the OSI (Open System Interconnection) model. The one that is important to networking professionals is called the IEEE 802. 284 Specialized Solutions. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. SAG SAG or SQL Access Group is working in conjunction with ISO to develop interoperability standards. the IEEE is subdivided into committees. See Appendix A for a summary of the 802. This is a common platform for transferring data from one database application to another.x committee.) publishes many standards for electrical and electronic equipment. As long as both are SQL compliant. ISO The International Standards Organization (ISO) is responsible for establishing international standards for all services and manufactured product. its emphasis is on SQL or the Structured Query Language.x sub-committees. Inc. the data can be smoothly transferred. As you may guess from its name. Be careful to not get ISO and OSI confused. Inc. Since they cover a wide variety of equipment. These standards are used for equipment operating in the Physical and Data link layers of the OSI Model.

Payment must be made each time you take the test. 285 . To register via the Internet. Method of payment. Individuals may retake the test as often as they like. When you call. Vouchers and coupons are also redeemed at this time.com for Prometric or www. or by requesting an invoice be sent to you or your employer. Tests are given at both Prometric and VUE Authorized Testing Centers. go to www.com for VUE.2test. either by credit card. Inc. and may be obtained by calling Prometric or VUE.Appendix D – How to Register for the Exam Appendix D – How to Register for the Exam To Register for the Network+ Exams Register for the Network+ Certification Exam by calling 1-888-895-6116 for Prometric or 1-877-551-7587 for VUE. Date you wish to take the test.vue. The test is available to anyone who wants to take the test. Prices subject to change without notice. Payment is made at the time of registration. credit card or voucher. Specialized Solutions. please have the following available: Social Security Number or Testing ID Two forms of ID (one with photo) Mailing address and telephone number.

Inc. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 286 Specialized Solutions.

or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals. opposite of digital. A continuously variable signal. or bits per second (bps). The highest layer of the OSI Model. The AWG wire number decreases as the wire thickness increases. these three terms are often used interchangeably. Acknowledgment message confirming receipt of the data packet. Application Server ARCNet ARP Attenuation AWG Bandwidth Specialized Solutions. The file server on an AppleTalk network. so they can communicate with other applications or nodes. 287 . Regenerates or amplifies a signal when it is passed through. American Wire Gauge AWG is the standard that describes wire thickness. usually expressed in cycles per second (Hertz or Hz). Inc. A dedicated server for applications. it supplies functions to applications. Attached Resource Computer Network Address Resolution Protocol The signal loss due to the physical properties of copper wire that happens over distance. program.Appendix E – Glossary Appendix E – Glossary Access Method ACK Active Hub Analog Signal AppleShare AppleTalk Application Application Layer A way of accessing the network. or computers on the network (nodes). Software. The difference between the lowest and highest transmission channel frequencies. The Apple networking protocol.

Hardware that connects one network with another. The location in a computer’s RAM of the beginning of the buffer area that is reserved for use by the NIC. Uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel. A bus driver. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable or medium. A process used to identify any area on the network that may be experiencing problems. Class C IP addresses are used for smaller networks that do not exceed 254 hosts. IP Address used by very large networks. A LAN in which all workstations are connected to a single cable. these are all in use at the present time. A form of mobile computing. IP Address used by medium-sized networks. such as Microsoft. Buffer Bus Topology Carrier Cellular Networking Class A IP Address Class B IP Address Class C IP Address 288 Specialized Solutions. or DEC. . GM. such as IBM. The signal flow is uni-directional.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Base I/O Port Address Base Memory Address Baseband Beaconing BNC Connector BOOTP Boot Prom Bridge Broadband The channel through which data flows between a computer’s hardware (such as a NIC) and the CPU. Companies contracted to carry our data over long distances. Inc. British Naval Connector BOOTstrap Protocol Boot Programmable Read Only Memory is used on networks that utilize diskless workstations. Can also refer to a class of memory registers and devices that match data transfer speeds between computers and hardware (peripherals). An area of memory that holds information for a peripheral device until it can be processed.

Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Carrier Sense NetWare Changes the frame types between the LAN and WAN Information.Appendix E – Glossary Client Client Software Clocking Coaxial Cable User computer “being served” by another computer. itself. which is. The method used by the NIC to count and pace the number of signals that it sends and receives. from computer or network to another. called a server. Data that is encoded for security reasons. or transmitted with a group of data in order to detect data corruption. stored. Cyclic Redundancy Check. or Cyclic redundancy Code. Inc. The signal bleed that occurs between individual wires in a cable. Same as a hub. to allow other tasks to run. as recognized by a computer and transmitted across a variety media. 289 . Concentrator Cooperative Multitasking CRC Crosstalk CSMA/CA CSMA/CD CSNW CSU/DSU Data Data Encryption Specialized Solutions. An electrical cable consisting of a solid piece of metal wire surrounded by insulation. surrounded by a tubular piece of plastic. using a specific protocol. at the sender’s level and then decoded at the recipient’s level. or language. in which it is the responsibility of the currently running task to give up the processor. A form of multitasking. is a number derived from. Software used by the client.

It performs error checking and re-transmits frames that were not received correctly. The use of two or more hard disks that “mirror” the main one. whichever one appears first on the list is considered the default gateway. such as an individual file. A limited form of bus mastering. in a round-robin fashion. The Data Link layer splits data into frames. This access method is designed for the 100 Mbps Ethernet standard 100VG-AnyLAN Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol .) Being able to recover data from a disaster. It also receives acknowledgement frames. for sending on the Physical layer. (Simple “on” or “off” signal. the second disk can locate the next segment while data is being transferred from the first disk. When you type the IP address of the gateway routers you have installed on your network. which are large areas of data that are split into smaller non-contiguous blocks. It is the last stop before the data packets are placed on the media for transmission. so that the segments can be written to multiple disk drives.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Data Link Layer The Data Link layer is the second lowest layer in the OSI model. Also called data striping. Baseband uses digital signals over a single frequency. If the processor is capable of reading or writing data faster than a single disk can supply or accept it. so that one can take over for the other if it fails. DMA allows a device to read and write memory without intervention by the CPU. Inc.A method for leasing and maintaining that lease for IP addresses and related information to clients. Domain Name System Default Gateway Demand Priority DHCP Digital Signal Disaster Recovery Disk Mirroring Disk Striping DMA (Direct Memory Access) DNS 290 Specialized Solutions. . this is the dividing into segments of logically sequential data.

with a very large amount of storage space for shared files. and other control information. A way to run AppleTalk on coaxial cable using an EtherTalk NB NIC. A local area network (LAN) recognized as the industry standard. sent over a communications channel. File Allocation Table A server on a network that is configured to provide both incoming and outgoing fax services to the entire network. A Windows NT utility that will allow you to log any events and errors.Appendix E – Glossary DSMN DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is another add-on utility that is used to integrate user and group account information between the two operating systems. Optical fibers carry digital signals in the form of modulated pulses of light. A set of programs running on a network’s gateway server that monitors incoming and outgoing traffic and allows only authorized packets to be transmitted or received. An improved version of X. error detection. Inc. Specialized Solutions. File Transfer Protocol Data can travel in both directions at once. 291 DUN EISA Bus Ethernet EtherTalk Event Viewer FAT Fax Server Fiber-Optic Cable File Server Firewall Frame Relay Frames FTP Full-Duplex .25 packet switching technology. A network’s central computer. A group of bits containing address information. Dial-up Networking Extended Industry Standard Architecture is a PC bus that converts the PC bus from 16-bits to 32-bits.

It precedes the actual data. Text files that are used to look up and resolve names to IP addresses. is usually represented in dotted decimal notation. or ring topologies. RFC 792. test packets. . The portion of a packet that contains source and destination addresses. A network topology that combines bus. Hypertext Transfer Protocol HyperText Transport Protocol Secure The center of a cabling system or a network with star topology architecture. GSNW Half-Duplex Header HOSTS and LMHOSTS files HTTP HTTPS Hub Hybrid Topology ICA ICMP ICS IFCONFIG IMAP4 Interoperability IP IP Address 292 Specialized Solutions. even though there may be multiple machines from multiple vendors. is an extension to the Internet Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Gateway A computer that acts as a translator. RFC 791. star. using different protocols. Internet Connection Sharing Shows the user’s network interface configuration Internet Messaging Access Protocol The ability of software and hardware to communicate. but only one at a time. and other information. and informational messages related to IP. HOSTS is used for DNS and LMHOSTS is used for WINS. Inc. Gateway Service for NetWare Half-Duplex can send transmissions both ways (send and receive). to communicate with each other. Internet Protocol This 32-bit host address defined by the Internet Protocol in STD 5. defined in STD 5. Independent Computing Architecture Internet Control Message Protocol. that enables two networks.

Specialized Solutions. 293 ISA Bus ISDN Kerberos L2TP LAN Laser Transmissions Latency LLC LocalTalk MAC Mail Server MAN Management Software MAU/MSAU . A system for user authentication Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol Local Area Network A wireless network standard that uses laser beams for the transmission of data. it’s “hardware address. and video data sources.” Server used for E-mail. Metropolitan Area Network The primary software package used by the administrator. The time it takes for a packet to go from sender to receiver. Media Access Control – a sublayer of the Data Link Layer.Appendix E – Glossary IPCONFIG IPsec IRQ DOS command that tells you the IP address for your computer. Integrated Services Digital Network is a set of communication standards that allows a single wire or optical fiber to carry voice. Multistation Access Unit in a Token Ring network. data. a device to attach multiple network stations in a star topology. Logical Link Control – a sublayer of the Data Link Layer AppleTalk networks are usually called LocalTalk. internally wired to connect the stations into a logical ring. A security protocol that works at network layer Interrupt Request causes the processor to temporarily suspend normal instruction execution and to start executing an interrupt handler routine. Inc. across a network connection. Industry Standard Architecture refers to the bus architecture used in the IBM PC. The MAC address is the address that is hardwired onto the NIC by the manufacturer.

. A method of data transmission. introduced by IBM for its PS/2 computer line. Media Media Tester Mesh Topology MHS Microwave Transmissions Multimeter Multistation Access Unit Multitasking Narrow-Band Radio NAS NAT NBTSTAT NDS NetBIOS Network Network Adapter Card 294 Specialized Solutions. A wireless network standard that uses microwave signals for data transmission. among others. protocol as well A group of computers linked together for the purpose of sharing resources. Single Frequency Radio.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide MCA Bus Micro Channel Architecture. totally incompatible with the original PC bus. A type of hub. Performing multiple tasks simultaneously. Tool used for testing the continuity and pin-outs of a cable Every device is connected to every other device by separate cables and has redundant paths. The transmitter and receiver are tuned to the same frequency. One of the most basic tools for electronic troubleshooting. and is used by CompuServe. Much like your local radio station. Inc. Also known as a network interface card. Message Handling System – A standard defined by ITU-T as X.400 and by ISO as Message-Oriented Text Interchange Standard (MOTIS). The actual ring in a Token Ring network is in the hub. Provides the physical connection to the network cable. a 32-bit bus. MHS provides the functions for global E-mail transfer among local mail systems. Network Attached Storage Network Address Translation NetBIOS Statistics NetWare Directory Services Names used with WINS.

Each part of an IP Address that contains eight bits of data is called an octet. A packet actually refers to Application layer data units (APDU). They extend the connection between the computer and the hub or between two hubs. A Windows NT service that allows for interoperability with the NetWare NOS. Network Operating System NT File System A TCP/IP utility command that will return information regarding the status of a network. depending on the protocol. Refers to the OSI (Open Systems Interface) Model. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) cards are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers (laptops) to provide the same expandability enjoyed by desktop computers. 295 Non-Routable Protocol NOS NTFS NTSTAT NWLink Octet OSI Packets Passive Hub Password Security Patch Cable PCI Bus PCMCIA Card . A “packet” may also refer to a frame or datagram. A generic term used to describe a unit of data. Specialized Solutions. The network layer handles all the routing information as packets travel from one network to another. A 32-bit architecture bus for PC expansion cards. Acts as a connection point only. The hardware that is used to construct the network plays an important role at this layer.Appendix E – Glossary Network Administrator Network Interface Card (NIC) Network Layer The individual who has complete responsibility for maintaining a network. A protocol that cannot be routed or passed through routers on a network. Inc. including network connectivity. An adapter circuit board installed in a computer that provides a physical connection to a network. A user has to enter a password to gain access to the network or to shared resources.

Defines a channel between a device and the processor. This layer determines the interface hardware and the medium that will be used to transmit the data from the Data Link layer.5 of Windows 3. Dedicated server for printing. The OSI model is the ideal protocol stack. used to circulate air through a building. depending upon the needs of the user. A group of protocols that are used to communicate between computers on a network. A way of testing the server to see if it is alive and functioning. The Physical layer is the lowest layer in the OSI Model. this feature has a different scheme called cooperative multitasking. . and even if a process takes full control. The Presentation layer formats data exchange. Inc. Peripheral Physical Layer PING Plenum Port Number POP3 PPP PPTP Preemptive Multitasking Presentation Layer Print Server Protocol Stack 296 Specialized Solutions. many third-party applications are available.1.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Peer-to-Peer Performance Monitor All the computers on the network can act as either a client or server. and running on TCP/IP. Although included as part of Windows NT. The preemptive feature allows NT to hand out slices of CPU time. allowing incompatible processes in the Application layer to communicate with the Session layer. The space between the ceiling and the floor above. A software tool that is used to monitor the performance of a network server. Post Office Protocol 3 Point-to-Point Protocol Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol Introduced in version 3. which means that a process can take control of the CPU and check for other processes. converting character sets and encrypting data. A hardware device. such as a printer or scanner. other processes will still run.

Connector used with UTP and STP network cables. which then routes the signal appropriately. In a Ring topology. Used for “punching” down wire to a block Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks Uses a MAC address to find an IP address. Redirects a call from one port to another. Used to increase cable distances in network environments. the devices are connected in a continuous loop. the user is connecting to the Internet via a secondary source. The signal is beamed towards a central unit. In Token-Ring networks. Storage Area Network Punch Down Tool RAID RARP RAS Redirector/Requester Reflective Infrared Repeater Resources Ring Speed Ring Topology RJ-11 Connector RJ-45 Connector Routable Protocol Router SAN Specialized Solutions.e. 297 . the ring speed on the NIC is set to either 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps. including support for dialup and logon. For example.Appendix E – Glossary Proxy Server One that serves many clients through only one connection. to be accessed via a modem. Flat cable with 2 or 4 conductors. Will hold up to 4 pairs of conductors. A protocol that can be routed over the internet or through routers on a network. i. The services or peripherals that are shared over the network. A device that forwards packets between networks. A service provided by Windows NT that allows most of the services provided by a network. the proxy server. Inc. Connector used with standard telephone wire. For example. redirects a print job from the local port to the network printer.

acknowledgments (ACK). A uni-directional data channel. SNMP is not limited to TCP/IP. Narrow-Band Radio Transmission Serial Line Internet Protocol. connection establishment and release. usually over Ethernet. as the signal is designed to bounce off of walls. SDH Security Server Server Software Session Layer Sharing Shielded Twisted Pair Simplex Single-Frequency Radio SLIP SMAU SMTP SNMP 298 Specialized Solutions. normally used on Ethernet. . The Session layer handles such things as security authentication. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The system used to protect data on a network from unauthorized use. is software that allows the Internet Protocol (IP). Simple Network Management Protocol. ceilings. Transmission rates are slower with this type. Smart Multistation Access Unit Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used to transfer E-mail between computers. was developed to manage nodes on an IP network. as opposed to duplex. A type of cable in which pairs of conductors are twisted together to prevent possible cross-talk from nearby wiring. A computer on a network that provides services to other computers. The effective distance of the signal is limited to about 100 feet. until it reaches the receiver. the Internet standard protocol defined in STD 15. RFC 1157.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Satellite Microwave Scatter Infrared A wireless network that utilizes microwave signals to transmit data. Software that resides on a server. Inc. data transfer. etc. Allowing files to be shared from one computer to another. to be used over a serial link. defined in RFC 1055.

Specialized Solutions. A form of microwave communication used for earthbased communication between two buildings. The maximum speed that “traffic” can move.5 Standard) environment. rigid coaxial cable with multiple shielding and an impedance of 50 ohms. or across large flat open areas. A type of coaxial cable whose maximum segment length is 185 meters. A way to run AppleTalk in a Token Ring (IEEE 802. The process of subdividing a network into logical units. Using binary addition. 299 SSL Star Topology Subnet Mask Subnetting TCP/IP TDR Terminator Terrestrial Microwave Thicknet Thinnet Throughput Token Passing Token Ring TokenTalk . that uses a large diameter. Inc. such as bodies of water or deserts.Appendix E – Glossary SONET Spread-Spectrum Radio Synchronous Optical Network Spread-spectrum broadcasts over a range of frequencies. Time-Domain Reflectometer – A cable tester. An access method used in a Token Ring topology. If the hub fails. This type of transmission is commonly used to connect multiple LAN segments together. A LAN topology that uses an access method called token passing. Maximum segment length is 500 meters. A connector that has a built-in resistor in order to absorb signals and eliminate signal bounce. An Ethernet cable variant commonly known as 10base5. Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol. Secure Sockets Layer A LAN topology in which all workstations are wired directly to a central workstation called a hub. so it is less susceptible to eavesdropping. a router can determine what addresses are local and what addresses are for other subnets within the network. the entire network goes down. the official protocol of the Internet. measured in Mbps (Megabits per minute).

like TCP. Additionally named traceroute in UNIX environments. When the receiver is placed in close proximity to the wire that has the signal applied. Virtual LAN Wide Area Network A command used to display the current configuration of a Windows computer. Twisted network cables that do not have any shielding. The “fox.” Trace Route command in NT allows you to specify a remote host and report back on each subsequent router and the times it takes to traverse those routers in a command line interface. RFC 768 is a connectionless protocol. Connectors that utilize sharp teeth to pierce the cable jacket to make the connection. . and for the errorfree delivery of the transmitted data. which. thus locating the wires.” A receiver set to the frequency of the generator. User Datagram Protocol. it will emit a tone. is layered on top of IP. The “hound. The Transport layer is responsible for packaging (and un-packaging) the data for transport. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Tone Generator Connected to the wires at the known location (the room with the outlet). A major operating system that is primarily used on minicomputers and has many features that are favored in the engineering and scientific environments. defined in STD 6. A device that transmits and receives data. Tool for stripping and cutting wire Tone Locator TRACERT Trailer Transceiver Transport Layer UDP UNIX Unshielded Twisted Pair Vampire Tap VLAN WAN WINIPCFG Wire Crimper 300 Specialized Solutions. Used on transceivers. The part of a data packet that contains the error corrections information. this applies a signal on the wires.

Appendix E – Glossary WINS SERVER A way for Microsoft hosts to register themselves. using zones Zones Specialized Solutions. 301 . resolve and also release the mapping of their network NetBIOS name to an IP address. AppleTalk can incorporate other types of networks. such as Token Ring. A named Subnetwork used for expanding the LocalTalk network or for relieving traffic on a larger network. Inc.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 302 Specialized Solutions. .

What does MAN stand for and why is it no longer in use? Metropolitan Area Networks have been replaced by the Internet. and manage (each user manages their own computer) for a small number of workstations (10 or less). 6. configure. No security. 2. Simple to install. such as data. A WAN is created by connecting LANs together. LANs typically also have much faster communication speed than WANs. What is the key difference between a local area network and a wide area network? A LAN is the basic building block (and smallest) of a network. loss of performance occurs if expanded over 10 workstations. Inc. and peripheral devices. Name some advantages of having centralized documents. inexpensive to install (no need to buy expensive server). Name some advantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. Workstations need to be close together (in a relatively small area. Dragging a printer from computer to computer for users to utilize is another form of a sneaker net. 303 . A WAN is not geographically limited. Specialized Solutions. like one office). It is confined to a limited area. 5. 3. Name some disadvantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. Access can be denied to unauthorized users (security). What is a “sneaker net”? The “old fashioned” way computer users shared resources by taking a file on a floppy disk to the computer that had the services they needed to use. Review Questions Chapter 1 1. 7.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers The following are the questions found at the end of each chapter along with the correct answers. 4. data backups can be more easily and routinely performed. Files are easily accessed by all users. applications. What is the main reason for networking computers? To share resources.

304 Specialized Solutions. Preemptive multitasking means that the operating system can take control of the processor without a task’s permission. The three basic topologies are: Bus. File and resource security available to limit unauthorized access. Centralized location of resources (server). Review Questions Chapter 2 1. Logical topologies represent the way that a networks functions. Ease of data backups. Star. What is the difference between a physical and logical topology? Physical topologies are the actual wires and hardware that we can see. and Demand Priority. 11. Centralized administration. Name two media access methods The access methods are CSMA/CD CSMA/CA. What is the difference between an operating system and a network operating system? Network operating systems are specialized operating systems designed to function in a network environment. Non-preemptive multitasking is when the task decides when it is done with the CPU. . Some NOSs function as the operating system that runs a computer’s stand-alone functions as well as its network interfaces. Inc. 2. More difficult to install and configure. Name the three basic topologies. Can be expanded as network grows. and Ring. Token Passing. What is the difference between preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking? Multitasking means that a computer has the ability to perform more than one task at a time. Increased performance on large networks. 12.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 8. 10. Name some advantages of a Server-based network. Expensive to install (will need to purchase expensive server). more difficult to manage (needs an administrator). 9. They represent what the topology looks like. Name some disadvantages of a Server-based network.

Unlike NetWare. It is a hierarchically organized database that provides security. Specialized Solutions. 8.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 3. What is NTFS? NTFS is the file system in Windows NT and it must be utilized in order to take full advantage of NT’s security features. 5. 6. Windows NT combines the operating system and the network operating system into one. Define interoperability. 7. 9. The purpose of the redirector is to make network resources look like local resources to the application. and volumes is also handled with NDS. 64 MB RAM. Organization of network resources such as users. redirecting them to the server. name service. Interoperability describes the ability of an operating system to interact with other operating systems. routing. management. groups. web-publishing. What is NDS? NDS (NetWare Directory Services) is the core of the NetWare operating system. servers. NetWare is a reliable operating system that provides excellent performance and security. and file and print services. What are the minimum hardware requirements for installing Novell NetWare version 5? Pentium Class or Higher CPU. Windows NT combines the _____________ and the ___________________ into one. 305 . messaging. What is the purpose of the redirector? The redirector (in Novell NetWare it is called the requester) forwards requests away from the local bus. 4. NetWare is designed as an operating system that will overlay _____________ environments. It is designed as an operating system that will overlay multi-operating system environments. 550 MB of free hard drive space. Inc.

CSNW (Client Services for NetWare) allows NT workstations to use file and print services on a NetWare server. Data Link. Application. A domain is simply a group of workstations with a shared security database. Name the seven layers of the OSI model. What is a domain? NT uses domains in order to accomplish its security goals. 11. What type of computer was developed by Apple computer in 1984? The Macintosh 15. Migration Tool for NetWare is used to convert NetWare accounts to NT. A network adapter card operates at the _______ layer of the OSI model Network layer 306 Specialized Solutions. and Physical 3.What type of network would utilize Windows for Workgroups as an operating system? Windows for Workgroups is a version of Windows 3. Transport. NWLink is a protocol based on Novell’s IPX/SPX and is used for communication between the two systems. Review Questions Chapter 3 1. Inc. Network. 16 MB RAM. 13. 12. What OS is similar to UNIX and is a publicly open system? Linux 14. Presentation. What are the minimum hardware requirements for Windows NT Server? 476DX-3 CPU. . FPNW (File and Print Services for NetWare) allows NetWare clients to access NT file and print services.1 that includes the ability to run a peer-to-peer network. 125 MB free hard drive space. Name some of the services and protocols that Microsoft included with Windows NT to ensure interoperability with NetWare. 2. Session. DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is used to integrate user and group account information between NT and NetWare. Who developed the OSI model? The OSI model was developed by ISO (International Organization for Standardization). GSNW (Gateway Services for NetWare) provides the gateway between an NT domain and the NetWare server.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 10.

Which OSI layer makes routing decisions? The Network layer Specialized Solutions. Which part of this MAC address is the Device ID? D3-B4-01 14. What is a MAC address? The MAC address is another name for the 12-digit (6-byte) hexadecimal address that is hardwired on the NIC by the manufacturer. managing. What is the function of the Presentation Layer? The Presentation layer is the translator for the network. simply a support layer that allows an application to use the network by acting as a translator. Physical 10. Which OSI layer is responsible the MAC address? The Data Link layer 8. 9. 11. It translates data into a format that is compatible with the network and back into a format that is compatible with the computer. Data compression takes place at the __________ layer of the OSI. What is the function of the Application Layer? The Application layer is responsible for communication between a user’s application and the network. A bridge operates at the ________ layer of the OSI model. 307 . Data Link layer 5. The ____________ layer is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. Presentation layer 7. 13. Which OSI layer is responsible for establishing. Network Layer 6.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 4. and ending connections? The Session layer 12. A router operates at the _________layer of the OSI model. This is not the actual application or program. Inc. It is a computer’s physical address.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 15. Which OSI layer is responsible for delivering data in sequence, without duplication and error free? The Transport layer 16. The Data Link layer has been split into two sub-layers. What are they? The Logical Link (LLC) layer and the Media Access Control (MAC) layer 17. What is the function of a Gateway? A gateway translates between two networks that use different protocols. A computer with special software serves as a gateway and allows for communication between completely dissimilar networks. 18. Which IEEE standard defines the Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer? 802.2 19. What are NDIS and ODI? They are Network Adapter Card interface specifications. They are incompatible with each other. NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification) was co-developed by Microsoft and 3Com, while ODI (Open Data Link Interface) was co-developed by Novell and Apple. The purpose of these standards is to allow operating system vendors to write multiple drivers for the same NIC. This way more than one protocol can be bound to a single NIC. 20. Describe protocol binding. In order to function, a protocol must be bound to the NIC. This binding process is what links the protocol stacks to the NIC driver. It is possible to bind two protocols the one NIC (such as TCP/IP and IPX/IPX) or to have two NICs with one protocol bound to each one. The order in which these protocols are bound to the NIC determines which one the network operating system will attempt to use first. 21. Which is faster, connection-oriented communication or connectionless communication? Connectionless communication is faster, but connection-oriented communication is more reliable. 22. . Name as many routable protocols as you can remember. AppleTalk, DECnet, IPX/SPX, PPP, PPTP, SLIP, SMB, SNA, TCP/IP, UDP, X.25, XNS 23.. You have expanded your NetBEUI network into two segments and are using an intelligent router to optimize network traffic. Will this work? Why or Why not? 308

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers No, NetBEUI is a non-routable protocol.

Review Questions Chapter 4

1. What is the maximum segment length of Thinnet? 185 meters 2. What is the maximum segment length of Thicknet? 500 meters 3. What type of connectors are used with Coaxial cable? BNC connectors 4. What is the purpose of a transceiver? A transceiver is a device that both transmits and receives data on a network. 5. How is a vampire tap connected? They utilize sharp teeth that puncture the cable to make the connection. 6. What is the purpose of plenum cabling? Plenum grade cabling is used in the plenum (the space between the ceiling and the floor above, which is used to circulate air in a building). Fire codes usually call for special cable in this area because PVC cable gives off poisonous gas and fumes when burned, which would end up being circulated throughout the building. 7. What is the maximum segment length of UTP? 100 meters 8. What is the transmission speed of category 5 cabling? Up to 100 Mbps

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

309

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 9. What is the most popular of the cable types? UTP is the less expensive of the twisted pair cable types. It is also flexible and easy to install, making it the most popular cable type. 10. Which twisted pair cabling is less sensitive to EMI? STP is insulated with a foil mesh between the wire pairs, which results in less sensitivity to EMI and crosstalk. 11. What type of connector is used with twisted pair cable? RJ-45 connectors 12. What is the most expensive cable type? Fiber-Optic cable is the ideal cable type for networking. However, it is the most expensive and most difficult to install. 13. What is the least expensive of the cable types? UTP is the least expensive of the cable types. It is also flexible and easy to install, making it the most popular cable type. 14. List some advantages of fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic supports extremely high bandwidths, segment lengths of up to several miles, and it is not subject to EMI or eavesdropping. 15. What does AWG stand for and what is it? American Wire Gauge (AWG) is the standard that describes wire thickness. The AWG wire number decreases as the wire thickness increases. 16. Describe baseband. Baseband uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel. 17. Describe broadband. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable, making the signal flow unidirectional. 18. What is the difference between simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex communication? Simplex communication is one way, can receive but not send. For example, a pager. Half-duplex communication can send or receive, but not at the same time. For example, a CB radio. Full-duplex can send and receive signals at the same time. For example, the telephone. 310 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 19. What is the function of a network adapter card? Network Adapter Cards or Network Interface Cards (NICs) are used to connect the computer to the network. (They make the physical connection to the network.) NICs translate the data that computers can understand into signals that can be transmitted over the network medium and back again. 20. In Token Ring networks, what are the two ring speeds available? In a Token Ring network if the correct ring speed is not selected a computer will not be able to connect to the network. The two choices available are 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps. 21. Where would you expect to find a PCMCIA card? PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) cards are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers (laptops) to provide the same expandability enjoyed by desktop computers, including network connectivity. 22. What are some of the reasons you would need to install a wireless network? To create a temporary network, to backup a cable-based network, to provide a mobile network environment, for areas where running cable would be impossible or unsightly, outdoor installations and to connect to remote sites such as a ship or oil platform. 23. What are the four basic wireless transmission types? Infrared, Laser, Radio, and Microwave 24. Which is the most secure type of radio wireless network? Spread-Spectrum Radio is more secure than Single-Frequency Radio (Narrow-Band Radio) because it broadcasts over a range of frequencies instead of just one. 25. Which microwave transmission type is used to transmit globally? Satellite microwave is used to transmit globally; Terrestrial microwave is used to transmit over shorter distances.

Review Questions Chapter 5

1. What are the three primary access methods? CSMA/CD & CSMA/CA, Token Passing, and Demand Priority Specialized Solutions, Inc. 311

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 2. Describe the difference between the two different contention methods CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA. CSMA/CD stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection and CSMA/CA stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance. Both CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA listen to the network cable to determine if it is free (Carrier Sense), if no data is traveling, a CSMA/CD computer will transmit. If there is another computer on the network that transmitted at exactly the same time, a data collision will occur, and both sets of data will be destroyed. CSMA/CD detects that a collision has occurred and waits a specified amount of time before re-transmitting. With CSMA/CA the process is much the same except that instead of just transmitting when it senses that the cable is free, it will send a signal that it is about to transmit. This will cause any other computer that was about to transmit to wait and so data collisions are avoided. This extra step can slow down network traffic, so CSMA/CA is not the most popular of the two contention methods. 3. Why isn’t token passing considered a contention method? A computer on a token passing access method network must possess the token in order to transmit data. Therefore, only one computer at a time will transmit in this kind of architecture, and so, no contention. 4. Describe how data is transmitted in Token Ring architecture A token, which is a special kind of packet, is circulated around the ring from computer to computer in a Token Ring network. A computer that wants to send data onto the network waits until the token is passed to it and takes possession of it. The transmitting computer encodes the token with the data that it wants to transmit, as well as header and trailer information that contain the destination and source addresses, as well as error control information. It then passes the token back out onto the ring where it travels on until it reaches the destination computer. The destination computer copies the data into its buffer and adds some acknowledgment information (or re-transmittal information if it detected errors) and releases the frame back out onto the network where it travels back to the source computer. Assuming that the data was transmitted error-free, the source computer removes the “used” frame from the network and creates a new “free” token to release back out onto the network.

312

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 5. What happens if two computers using the demand priority access method transmit at exactly the same time? If the hub receives two transmissions at exactly the same time the one with the highest priority is processed first. If the two transmissions have the same priority level, they are processed at the same time by alternating between the transmissions. 6. How is data transmitted over the network cable? In packets or frames. (Small chunks of data at a time.) 7. What is CRC and what part of the packet is it usually located in? CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is a mathematical calculation that is calculated at the source computer and included in the trailer of the packet. When data arrives at the destination computer, the calculation is redone and if it calculates as it did at the source computer it is assumed that the data arrived intact. 8. What sort of information do packet headers contain? The header contains information such as an alert signal that announces that data is being transmitted, the source and destination addresses and clocking information. 9. What does the “T” in 10BaseT indicate? The first part indicates transmission speed (10 means it transmits at 10 Mbps), the second part “Base” indicates that it uses baseband (single channel) technology and the last part indicates the cabling type, or maximum segment length in the case of coaxial cable. (“T” indicates Twisted-pair). 10. What is the maximum segment length in 10Base2? 185 Meters. The “2” in this case means 2 times 100 meters, but in the case of Thinnet coaxial cable the maximum segment length is 185 meters. 11. What type of connectors are used in 10Base5? BNC connectors 12. What type of cable is used in 10BaseFL? Fiber-Optic 13. Name the two main 100 Mbps Ethernet Standards. 100VG-AnyLAN, also called 100BaseVG, VG, and AnyLAN. The VG stands for Voice Grade. 100BaseX is sometimes called Fast Ethernet. It has different specifications depending upon the type of cabling used (hence the “X” in the area that indicates cable type). Specialized Solutions, Inc. 313

What is a SMAU? SMAU stands for Smart Multistation Access Unit. Describe a MIC connector. Which IEEE Specification defines Ethernet? The IEEE 802. How are data collisions avoided in the Token Ring architecture? A computer must posses the token in order to transmit data. MIC (Media Interface Connectors) are connectors that have neither male nor female ends. Any connector can be connected to another MIC connector. 20. It is more commonly set up to travel clockwise. 19. Which IEEE Specification defines Token Ring? The IEEE 802. The active monitor (which is the first computer to go online) is responsible for monitoring network activity to make sure that frames are being sent and received accurately. This is a hub that has all of the features of an active hub (regenerates or amplifies the signal) with additional capabilities such as certain network management functions. data collisions are avoided. 18. however. Since no other computer can transmit while one computer has the token. It does this by transmitting a signal every seven seconds. IEEE 802.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 14. It can be either depending upon how it is set up. Inc. It also ensures that only one token is traveling the ring at a time and investigates any frames that have traveled around the ring more than once. A SMAU may have the capability to shut down a connection that is producing errors thereby allowing the rest of the network to function. 21. The main thing is that data only travels in one direction on a Token Ring network. What are the two transmission speeds of Token Ring? 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps 17. while IBM says that it travels counter-clockwise.5 standard 16. They are also called hermaphrodite connectors. If a computer doesn’t receive an expected signal from its upstream neighbor it will notify the monitor that a problem may exist. Which way does data travel in a Token Ring network? Which way data travels in a Token Ring network is a matter of convention.3 standard 15. 314 Specialized Solutions. This signal is called beaconing and it travels from computer to computer.5 says it travels clockwise. Describe beaconing as it applies to Token Ring architecture. .

Review Questions Chapter 6 1. Inc. etc. It also provides a print server. What is the purpose of AppleShare? AppleShare is the name of the file server on an AppleTalk network. What are the two most prominent reasons to choose a peer-to-peer network? The best reasons for using peer-to-peer are its simplicity and low cost. It first goes to computer #1 and then #2. It does this even if computer #1 is at the opposite end of the network from computer #2. 23. It then broadcasts the address to determine if any other computer on the network is using it. 24. Is NetBEUI a good protocol to use with a large WAN? No. it stores it to use each time it connects to the network. What are the two areas of concern when starting a network project? You will need to consider the customer and the network goals. 25. What are the two tools required to initiate a network design? All you need to start a network project is a pencil and some paper. What type of access method is utilized by an ARCNet network? Token-passing. How does data flow in an ARCNet network? The token is passed around the network in numerical order. If no other computer is using the address. 315 .Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 22. NetBEUI is a non-routable protocol and will not interface with routers. 2. 3. How does a computer on a LocalTalk network obtain its address? When a computer first comes online in a LocalTalk network it randomly selects an address from a range of allowable addresses. 4. What is the number one reason for choosing a client/server network? The number one reason for using a client/server network is security. 5. Specialized Solutions.

However. Why should you refuse this offer? First.microsoft. What is the difference between a hub and a MAU? Hubs are used with Ethernet networks and MAUs are used with Token Ring networks. 2. you cannot be sure that they will meet the specifications of your network. Your company just bought ten new computers and all are guaranteed to meet the minimum requirements of Windows XP. Give one reason why you should recommend that he spend a little more now and install CAT 6 cabling instead of CAT 5. he intends to expand the network in the future.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 6. having to maintain a variety of network cards will increase the workload of your IS department – it is better to standardize network cards in a large network. Was this a good purchase? No – the minimum requirements are just enough to run the NOS. 9. It will be less costly to install CAT 6 now than to replace the CAT 5 later when the network needs to be upgraded from 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps to handle the higher traffic. Your client is installing a small Ethernet network and trying to save money at the same time. Also. You are expanding your network and will need to invest in 50 to 100 new network cards. An active hub requires some input power. 7. 8. Your accounting office found a really good deal on network cards. Inc. Review Questions Chapter 7 1. How do you know if a new piece of hardware will work with Windows XP? Check the Windows Catalog on the web at www. . Passive hubs are used only to make connections. but not enough to run it efficiently. but they are not all the same. 316 Specialized Solutions.com/windows/catalog. What is the difference between an active hub and a passive hub? Active hubs are used to connect nodes and boost the signal strengths.

Describe the difference between BAUD and bps. They do however.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 3. In older modems. 317 . 10. Think of a gateway as a computer that acts as a translator between two networks that don’t speak the same language. PPP. Repeater . Repeaters work in the Physical layer of the OSI model.544 Mbps transmissions is called? T1 6. 8. Specialized Solutions. BAUD rate is the number in cycles per second of the carrier signal of a modem. SLIP. Gateway . but it can switch packets across multiple networks. and SONET 7. and a gateway. They do not translate or filter any information. BAUD and bps were the same thing. NetBEUI is not routable. Frame Relay. Name four forms of RAS security. PPTP and L2TP 9. A bridge can be used to isolate segments on a LAN. Name three advanced WAN environments.A router has all the features of a bridge. a router. amplify the signal thereby compensating for signal loss due to long cables. 5. Callback Security.A repeater is a device that is used to extend the cable lengths of a network segment. Auditing. A bps or bit per second is the actual data transmission rate of a modem. BAUD is limited to 2400 bps. Define a repeater.A bridge does the same things as a repeater but has one additional feature. For example. and PPTP filtering. thus reducing the traffic for each segment. Security host. They can also determine the best path for “routing” traffic and filter broadcast traffic to the local segment. What is analog communication? Analog communication is based on PSTN or public switched telephone network. Inc. 4. ISDN. A form of digital line that is capable of 1.Gateways make it possible to connect different network architectures. Name three RAS protocols. What are the two components of remote network accessing? RAS (remote access server) and DUN (dial up networking). Bridge . Router . a bridge. Bridges work in the Data Link layer of the OSI model. Not all network protocols will work with a router.

IP. 5. and HTTP. What is an FQDN and give an example? FQDN is a Fully Qualified Domain Name. 8. What is a domain? A domain is a group of computers that share a common general purpose. What is the value of the leading bit (one on the far left) for a Class A IP address? Class B? Class C? Class A Class B Class C 318 01-126 128-191 192-223 (leading bit is 0) (leading bit is 1) (leading bits 11) Specialized Solutions. 3. Internet and Network Interface. An example is http://www. 32 10. HTU UTH 6. 7. 2. Transport.microsoft. FTP. Which of the name resolution services will work only in Windows? WINS 9. IPv4 addresses consist of a ______ bit number. What is the purpose of DNS? The Domain Name System is used to resolve host names into IP addresses. Who is responsible for maintaining top-level domains? The InterNIC (Internet Network Information Center) is responsible for top-level domain names. Name three of the five other protocols used within TCP/IP Additional protocols are: POP3. Inc. and ARP. 4. SMTP. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 8 1.com. SNMP. ICMP. What are the four layers that make up the TCP/IP protocol suite? The four layers of TCP/IP are: Application. UDP. How many primary protocols are used to make the TCP/IP Suite? There are five primary protocols: they are – TCP.

What kind of software package can you purchase to help analyze your network? Network Management Software is used to analyze network traffic and network status. What are five reasons to use subnetting? Connect physically remote local networks Connect a mix of network technologies (Ethernet and Token Ring) Allow an unlimited number of hosts to communicate Reduce network traffic by limiting broadcast and local traffic to a single segment Review Questions Chapter 9 1. ROUTE. Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into _________ and ________ groups Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into meaningful and manageable groups. 2.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 11. U U U U 12. NETSTAT and TRACERT. Event Viewer. Specialized Solutions. You are the manager of a large network and have been getting complaints about the system being slow. List as many as you can. In order for your new network management software to monitor the activities of the entire network. NBTSTAT. each device will need to be _________ compliant. Inc. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 3. TCP/IP provides several tools that you can use to validate the statistics of your network. 319 .

passwords are assigned to __________. 2. In a share level model. . The acronym RAID stands for____________? Redundant Array of Independent Disks or Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. Inc. What are the three most common levels of RAID? RAID 0 Non-redundant striped array RAID 1 Mirrored arrays RAID 5 Striped array with parity 6. It can also be configured to prevent unauthorized transmissions from leaving your network. What is the function of a firewall? A firewall is used to prevent unauthorized access to your network from outside via the Internet.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 10 1. 320 Specialized Solutions. What purpose does encryption play in your security model? Encryption encodes a message so that it cannot be read if it is intercepted during transmission. What are the two requirements of user level logon? The user must type in a Username and a Password. Resources 3. 5. 4.

are you finished with the troubleshooting process? NO – You still need to confirm the repair and document the problem and solution. 3. WINIPCFG from the RUN command.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Review Questions Chapter 11 1. You are working with a TCP/IP network and want to confirm the protocol stack in a specific workstation. 5.1 7. You need to know the IP address of a workstation. Isolate the Problem. but need to know which of the 50 cables goes to the accounting office. After repairing a problem. Specialized Solutions. What are the three primary steps to take when troubleshooting? The three steps to troubleshooting are: Define the Problem. Inc. You have just connected a workstation to the network. You are troubleshooting a cable problem. 4. What utility can you use to confirm the protocol stack is good? PING the loopback IP. and think it might be shorted. What tool would you need to find the short? TDRs (Time-Domain Reflectometers) are used to locate shorts in cables. You have located the cable in question #3. you should see the green light that indicates that the network card has detected the presence of a network. What TCP/IP utility can you use to find the IP address of the workstation? You can use IPCONFIG from a DOS prompt or if using Windows. 8.0. 321 . What is the easiest way to tell if the network card can “see” the network? If the network card has indicator lights. 6. You have found the cabinet with the patch panel and hub. 2. What is the loopback IP address? 127. and Repair the Problem. The fox and hound. What would be the best tool to help you locate the cable in question? The best tool for isolating a single cable from many is the tone generator or tone locator.0.

. What is the difference between bandwidth and throughput? Bandwidth is the amount of traffic that a network can handle at a given time. Throughput is the maximum speed that a message can be transmitted. You have a Windows 2000 network and received complaints that the server is running slow. 10. What utility can you use to determine the performance of the server? Performance Monitor 322 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 9. Inc.

196 Class C. 122 AppleTalk. 89 AppleShare. 41 CSU/DSU. 160 Category 3. 21 Carriers. 119 binding. 164 Class A. 109 DES (Data Encryption Standard). 91 domain. 116 10Base2. 79 AWG. 61 C Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD. 24 Address Resolution Protocol. 96 brouter. 39 Circuit-switched. 114 10Base5. 81 Category 5. 189 domain controller. 166 attenuation. 65 continuity. 108 Active Directory. 151 connection-oriented. 89 cloud. 70 DMA. 34 DECnet. 167 bridge. 78. 78 Boot Prom’s. 38 Client Software. 243 CSMA/CD. 40. 39 AUI connector. 114 10BaseT. 86 Broadband Optical Telepoint. 92 Boot Sector. 42 active hubs. 67. 67 demand priority.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Index 1 100BaseX. 230 Differential backup. 186 Analog. 70 coaxial cable. 116 100VG-AnyLAN. 226 Bandwidth. 98 Change. 323 . 109 CSNW. 123 ARP. 217 ATM. 161 Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC). 40 Specialized Solutions. 121 Application Layer. 231 BOOTP. 114 10BaseFL. 81 Cellular Networking. 89 Direct Memory Access (DMA). 86 Beaconing. 65 BNC. 78. 90 DLC. 253 Banyan VINES. 108. 52 Data Protection. 13 Clocking. 196 client software. 69. 86 B backbone. 77 Computer compatibility. 34 clients. 111 D Data Link Layer. 60 Broadband. 60 attributes. 50 application server. 16. 191 BRI. 13 ARCNet. 114 A access method. 79 backup utility. 42 base memory address. 196 Class B. Inc. 226 Digital. 91 Baseband.

86 G gateway. 83 IBM Type 3 UTP. 67 IRQ. 86 firewall. 197 IPX. 68. 93 ISDN. 41 Frame Relay. 96 Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.. 174 IPv6. 39 IP. 224 FPNW. 185 interoperability. 42 GSNW. 187 HTTPS. 174 Line-of-Sight Infrared. 166 fiber-optic. 112 HOSTS file. Inc. 159 Gigabit Ethernet. 167 FTP. 157 hybrid topologies. 144 Ethernet. 226 Infrared. 174 LAN. 71 ICS. 114 EtherTalk. 191 dynamic routers. 62 Internet Control Message Protocol. 18 I I/O port number. 161 . 42 Headers.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Domain Name Service (DNS). 68. 191 gateways. 56 324 Specialized Solutions. 187 hubs. 187 Full backup. 215 F Fast Ethernet. Inc. 96 Linux. 93 EMI. 174 ICMP. 167 ISDN adapters. 41 Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP). 191 HTTP. (IEEE). 186 Internet Protocol (IP). K Kerberos. 226 Full Control. 217 IMAP4. 249 IPsec. 86 headers. 61 Gateways. 122 Event Viewer. 194 IPCONFIG. 83 File Infectors. 96 LAT. 12 Laser. 231 fire codes. 91 IBM cabling. 186 Incremental backup. 21. 226 FDDI . 185 IP address. 41 H Half-Duplex. 217. 174 L L2TP. 91 ISA. 60 E EES. 120 ICA. 39 fault tolerance.Fiber Distributed Data. 231 EISA. 70 Layer Two Tunneling Protocol. 22 FAT. 189 Domain Reflectometer (TDR). 39 Full-Duplex. 116 ground probe. 81 environment. 245 DSMN. 192 IFCONFIG. 243 Group policies.

167 protocol. 213 MIC (Media Interface Connectors). 43 Macro Virus. 29 OS/2. 13 peer-to-peer. 168 MSAU. 120 Multimeter. 30 N NAT. 70 NETBIOS. 29 NSLOOKUP. 39 Null-Modem. 93 PDC . 164 Packet-Radio Networking. 243 multitasking. 171 NWLink. 114 LMHOSTS. 64 NDS (NetWare Directory Services). 68 O ODI.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers LLC. 36 NetWare Client32 for OS/2. 107 protocols. . 64 Open Systems Interface (OSI). 231 physical topologies. 114 Network Time Protocol (NTP). 157 PCI. 34 MAU. 217 NTFS. 217 PING.Primary Domain Controller. Inc. 190 NETSTAT. 122 logical topology. 67 NDIS. 52 Network Neighborhood. 41. 215 NCP. 229 Patch Panel. 64 proxy server. 243 mesh topology. 69 Network-attached storage (NAS). 172 Preemptive multitasking. 18 MHS. 249 plenum. 191 LocalTalk. 36 NetWare file server. 18 Ping. 36 NetWare Client32 for DOS. 21 Media Compatibility. 67 M Macintosh. 192 Punch Down Tool.Multiple Access Units. 39 NOS – Network Operating System. 86 PPP. 242 325 Specialized Solutions. 23 media access methods. 36 NetWare Client32 for Windows 95. 98 packets. 67 modem. 67 No Access. 31 PGP. 215 NetWare. 71. 18 LSL. 89 passive hub. 37 NetWare security. 14 Peer-to-peer LANs. 23 Passwords. 30 PRI. 69 NLSP. 71. 120 Microwave. 49. 191 NBTSTAT. 37 NetWare Print Services. 120. 49 operating system. 228 NFS. 172 PPTP. 151 Media Tester. 32 P Packet switching. 36 NetBEUI. 37 MIB (Management Information Base). 89 Network Layer. 93 PCMCIA. 36 NetWare Client32 for Macintosh. 37 Network Adapter Cards. 232 Managing User Accounts. 31 Network standards. 157 MAUs . 111 parallel communication. 96 MLID.

217 Read. 17 static routers. 13 sharing applications. 187 Software analyzers. 69 terminator. 79 thicknet. 174 token passing. 98 Scatter Infrared. 184 Telnet. 79 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). 71. 118 topology. 187 SNA. 60. 215. 144 Server Software. 16 twisted-pair. 225 repeater. sneaker net. 79 Transport Layer. 232 troubleshooting. 68 326 Specialized Solutions. 225 removable optical disk. 199 T tape backup. 81 Subnetting. 68 Satellite Station Networking. 159 routers. 120 SMB. 225 TCP. 77 throughput. 152 star topology. 80 U UDP. 175 Security. 69. 39 redirector. 86 SLIP. 67. 71 RSA. 68 SMDS. Inc. 34. 65 RPC. 21. 144 Remote Access Server or RAS. 69 ROUTE. 167 security. 17 RIP. 109 token ring. 60 Storage Area Network (SAN). 71. 16. 68 Trojan Horses. 172 SMAU. 60. 253 TLS. 221 segment. 77 Thinnet. 16. 215 router. 51 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). 167 SMTP.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide R Radio. 230 S SAP. 11 SNMP. 58 . 158 requester. 34 server-based network. 167 SPX. 67 SSL. 68. 171 removable disks. 42 User Datagram Protocol (UDP). 174 Standards. 80 V vampire taps. 35 ring topology. 33 servers. 13 Server-based network. 16 serial communication. 249 Trailer. 237 trunk. 182 UNIX. 35 Reflective Infrared. 16 TRACERT. 112 transceiver. 68. 89 Server room. 185 UTP. 213 Simplex. 245 SONET. 227 RARP. 96 SDH. 11 signal bounce. 228 STP. 96 RAID. 96 relative humidity. 80 virtual connections.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Viruses. 242 Wireless. 13 X X. 71 XNS. 12 Warp Connect. 40 U U WINS. 92 workstation. 19. 230 W WAN. 95 Wireless NICs. 231 VLAN. 31 Windows NT Print Servers. 190 Wire Crimper. 166 XDR. 69. 327 . 70 Specialized Solutions. 165 VPN’s (Virtual Private Networks). 154 Windows 95/98. 31 Windows for Workgroups.25. 124 wireless network. Inc. 32 Windows 2000.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful